+

WO2018139169A1 - Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and method for determining camera system compatibility - Google Patents

Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and method for determining camera system compatibility Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018139169A1
WO2018139169A1 PCT/JP2017/047321 JP2017047321W WO2018139169A1 WO 2018139169 A1 WO2018139169 A1 WO 2018139169A1 JP 2017047321 W JP2017047321 W JP 2017047321W WO 2018139169 A1 WO2018139169 A1 WO 2018139169A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
camera
lens
polarity
terminal
accessory
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/047321
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
賢司 今村
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to DE112017006938.6T priority Critical patent/DE112017006938B4/en
Priority to JP2018564188A priority patent/JP6571888B2/en
Priority to CN201780084791.2A priority patent/CN110226125B/en
Publication of WO2018139169A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018139169A1/en
Priority to US16/447,504 priority patent/US10785408B2/en
Priority to US16/999,991 priority patent/US11336821B2/en
Priority to US17/711,676 priority patent/US11722766B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/665Control of cameras or camera modules involving internal camera communication with the image sensor, e.g. synchronising or multiplexing SSIS control signals
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/02Bodies
    • G03B17/12Bodies with means for supporting objectives, supplementary lenses, filters, masks, or turrets
    • G03B17/14Bodies with means for supporting objectives, supplementary lenses, filters, masks, or turrets interchangeably
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/56Accessories
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B17/00Details of cameras or camera bodies; Accessories therefor
    • G03B17/56Accessories
    • G03B17/565Optical accessories, e.g. converters for close-up photography, tele-convertors, wide-angle convertors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/66Remote control of cameras or camera parts, e.g. by remote control devices
    • H04N23/663Remote control of cameras or camera parts, e.g. by remote control devices for controlling interchangeable camera parts based on electronic image sensor signals
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2206/00Systems for exchange of information between different pieces of apparatus, e.g. for exchanging trimming information, for photo finishing

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an interchangeable lens camera system, a camera, an interchangeable lens, and a compatibility determination method thereof.
  • the camera and the interchangeable lens are used in various combinations. As a result, a new type camera and an old type interchangeable lens may be used in combination.
  • New types of cameras may have new functions.
  • the old types of interchangeable lenses may not be able to use the functions.
  • the functions installed in the new type of interchangeable lens may not be used with the old type camera.
  • the compatibility of both the camera and the interchangeable lens is determined at startup.
  • the camera system described in Patent Document 1 has a configuration in which predetermined information is transmitted and received between the camera and the interchangeable lens at the time of activation to determine compatibility.
  • the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and a camera system, a camera, an interchangeable lens, and a compatibility determination method for a camera system that can easily and quickly determine compatibility between a camera and an interchangeable lens.
  • the purpose is to provide.
  • a camera system including a camera and an interchangeable lens that is detachably attached to the camera, wherein the camera has a camera-side communication terminal and a camera-side communication terminal having a first polarity or a second polarity.
  • the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit is set to the first polarity when the camera is compatible with a specific function, and is set to the second polarity when the camera is not compatible.
  • An interchangeable lens comprising: a polarity setting unit; and a camera side determination unit that detects the polarity of the communication terminal on the camera side and determines that the interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function when the detected polarity is the first polarity.
  • Interchangeable lenses are specific
  • the first polarity is set.
  • the lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit to be set to the second polarity and the polarity of the lens side communication terminal are detected.
  • a lens-side determination unit that determines that the camera corresponds to a specific function in the case of the first polarity, and the camera-side communication terminal and the lens-side communication terminal are both connected in the first state.
  • a camera system in which both are first polarities only when set to polarities, and both are second polarities when at least one is set to second polarities.
  • compatibility is determined based on the polarities of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal.
  • the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both set to the first polarity only when both are set to the first polarity while being connected to each other, and at least one is set to the second polarity. In the case of both, the operation of the second polarity is performed. It functions as a so-called logical product.
  • Such a function can be realized, for example, by configuring the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal with terminals capable of open drain output.
  • the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when the camera is not compatible, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the second polarity.
  • the interchangeable lens When the lens itself is compatible with a specific function, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when the lens is not compatible, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is the second polarity. Set to polarity. In this case, only when both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal becomes the first polarity. Otherwise, it is the second polarity.
  • compatibility can be determined by determining the polarity states of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal. That is, it can be determined that the camera-side communication terminal and the lens-side communication terminal are compatible when the polarity is the first polarity and not compatible when the polarity is the second polarity.
  • the case of no compatibility is a case where at least one of the camera and the interchangeable lens does not support a specific function.
  • compatibility can be determined based on the polarities of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal, compatibility between the camera and the interchangeable lens can be determined easily and quickly.
  • the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are each one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication.
  • the camera is exchanged after the determination by the camera side determination unit.
  • the camera-side communication setting unit further performs communication setting of a plurality of terminals used for serial communication with the lens, and the interchangeable lens has a plurality of terminals used for serial communication with the camera after determination by the lens-side determination unit.
  • the camera system according to (1) further including a lens side communication setting unit configured to perform the communication setting.
  • compatibility is determined using one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication as the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal.
  • the terminals used as the camera-side communication terminal and the lens-side communication terminal are used for communication, which is the original application, after determining compatibility.
  • the above-described (1) or (1) further includes an accessory that is detachably mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens, and the specific function is a function of communicating with the mounted accessory when the accessory is mounted.
  • the camera system includes an accessory.
  • the presence / absence of a function to communicate with the attached accessory is determined as the presence / absence of a specific function.
  • the camera further includes a camera-side extended communication terminal
  • the interchangeable lens further includes a lens-side extended communication terminal that is connected to the camera-side extended communication terminal when attached to the camera, and the accessory is attached to the camera.
  • An accessory-side first extended communication terminal connected to the camera-side extended communication terminal when connected
  • an accessory-side second extended communication terminal connected to the lens-side extended communication terminal when the interchangeable lens is attached.
  • the camera is provided with the camera side extended communication terminal
  • the interchangeable lens is provided with the lens side extended communication terminal.
  • the camera side extended communication terminal and the lens side extended communication terminal are connected to each other when the interchangeable lens is attached to the camera.
  • the camera and the interchangeable lens communicate via the camera side extended communication terminal and the lens side extended communication terminal.
  • the accessories include an accessory-side first extended communication terminal connected to the camera-side extended communication terminal when attached to the camera, and an accessory connected to the lens-side extended communication terminal when the interchangeable lens is attached.
  • Side second extended communication terminal is provided.
  • both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, that is, when both support the function of communicating with the accessory, the camera and the accessory are on the camera side. Communication is performed via the extended communication terminal and the accessory-side first extended communication terminal.
  • the interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal.
  • the camera When an accessory is attached and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, the camera is connected via the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first extended communication terminal.
  • the camera system which communicates with and acquires the information of an accessory from an accessory.
  • the camera Communicates with the accessory via the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first extended communication terminal, and acquires information on the accessory from the accessory.
  • the accessory information can be acquired on the camera side.
  • the interchangeable lens is connected via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal.
  • Communicate with the accessory send information about the interchangeable lens to the accessory, the accessory communicates with the camera via the accessory-side first extended communication terminal and the camera-side extended communication terminal, and the information on the interchangeable lens received from the interchangeable lens.
  • the replacement lens communicates with the accessory via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and transmits information on the interchangeable lens to the accessory.
  • the accessory communicates with the camera via the accessory-side first extended communication terminal and the camera-side extended communication terminal, adds the accessory information to the information on the interchangeable lens received from the interchangeable lens, and transmits the information to the camera. Thereby, the information of an interchangeable lens and accessories can be acquired at once on the camera side.
  • the camera After acquiring information about the accessory, the camera communicates with the interchangeable lens through the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal, The camera system according to (5) or (6), wherein information on the state of the interchangeable lens is acquired from the interchangeable lens.
  • the camera after acquiring the accessory information, the camera is connected to the interchangeable lens via the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal. Communicate and obtain information on the status of the interchangeable lens from the interchangeable lens.
  • the extended communication terminal can be effectively used even after acquiring the accessory information.
  • the interchangeable lens further includes a lens side extended communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the lens side extended communication terminal to the first polarity, and the accessory sets the polarity of the accessory side first extended communication terminal to the second polarity.
  • the accessory-side first extended communication terminal polarity setting unit to be set is further included.
  • the camera further includes an accessory detection unit that detects the polarity of the camera-side extended communication terminal and detects attachment of the accessory. If the polarity of the side extended communication terminal is the first polarity, it is determined that the accessory is attached. If the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal is the second polarity, it is determined that the accessory is not attached.
  • the camera system according to any one of (4) to (7), wherein the mounting is detected.
  • the lens side extended communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the lens side extended communication terminal to the first polarity
  • the accessory side first that sets the polarity of the accessory side first extended communication terminal to the second polarity
  • an extended communication terminal polarity setting unit The camera detects the attachment of the accessory by detecting the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal. Specifically, when the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal is the first polarity, it is determined that the accessory is attached. When the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal is the second polarity, the accessory is not attached. Judgment and detection of attachment of accessories. Thereby, the presence or absence of attachment of an accessory can be detected easily and quickly.
  • a camera-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity to the first polarity or the second polarity, and is set to the first polarity when the camera supports a specific function, and the first when the camera does not support the specific function.
  • the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets two polarities, and the camera side that detects the polarity of the camera side communication terminal and determines that the interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function when the detected polarity is the first polarity
  • the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is set to the first polarity
  • the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is the second polarity.
  • the polarity is set and the camera Both the terminal and the lens side communication terminal are set to the first polarity when both are connected to each other, and both are set to the first polarity, and both are set to the second polarity when at least one is set to the second polarity. Camera with second polarity.
  • compatibility can be determined based on the polarity of the camera side communication terminal, compatibility with the interchangeable lens can be determined easily and quickly.
  • the camera side communication terminal is one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera performs serial communication with the interchangeable lens, and is used when serially communicating with the interchangeable lens after determination by the camera side determination unit.
  • compatibility is determined using one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera performs serial communication with the interchangeable lens as the camera-side communication terminal. This eliminates the need for a separate camera-side communication terminal and simplifies the configuration.
  • the terminal used as the camera side communication terminal is used for communication which is the original purpose after the compatibility determination.
  • An interchangeable lens that is detachably attached to the camera, and when attached to the camera, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal connected to the camera side communication terminal provided in the camera and the polarity of the lens side communication terminal
  • a lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the first polarity or the second polarity.
  • the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the first polarity
  • the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the second polarity.
  • compatibility can be determined based on the polarity of the lens side communication terminal, compatibility with the camera can be determined easily and quickly.
  • the lens side communication terminal is one of a plurality of terminals used when the interchangeable lens performs serial communication with the camera, and a plurality of terminals used when performing serial communication with the camera after determination by the lens side determination unit.
  • compatibility is determined using one of a plurality of terminals used when the interchangeable lens performs serial communication with the camera as the lens-side communication terminal. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide a lens side communication terminal, and the configuration can be simplified.
  • the terminal used as the lens side communication terminal is used for communication which is the original purpose after the compatibility is determined.
  • a compatibility determination method for a camera system including a camera and an interchangeable lens that is detachably attached to the camera, the step of attaching the interchangeable lens to the camera, and camera-side communication provided in the camera
  • the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when it does not support, the second polarity is set.
  • the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when it does not support, the second polarity is set.
  • the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both set to the first polarity only when both are set to the first polarity while being connected to each other, and at least one is set to the second polarity. In both cases, both have the second polarity. Therefore, compatibility can be determined by determining the polarity states of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal.
  • the interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function only when the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is the first polarity.
  • the camera supports a specific function only when the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is the first polarity.
  • the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication, and the interchangeable lens attached to the camera corresponds to a specific function.
  • a plurality of units used for serial communication between the camera and the interchangeable lens after the step of determining whether or not the camera to which the interchangeable lens is attached corresponds to the specific function.
  • compatibility is determined using one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication as the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal.
  • the terminals used as the camera-side communication terminal and the lens-side communication terminal are used for communication, which is the original application, after determining compatibility.
  • the camera system further includes an accessory that is detachably mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens, and the specific function is the accessory that is mounted when the accessory is mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens.
  • the camera system includes an accessory.
  • the presence / absence of a function to communicate with the attached accessory is determined as the presence / absence of a specific function.
  • the interchangeable lens when an accessory is mounted and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, that is, when both support the function of communicating with the accessory, the camera And the accessory communicate via the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first extended communication terminal.
  • the interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal.
  • the interchangeable lens and the accessory in the step where the interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate, information about the interchangeable lens is transmitted to the accessory.
  • the accessory adds its own information to the information on the interchangeable lens received from the interchangeable lens and transmits the information to the camera. Thereby, the information of an interchangeable lens and accessories can be acquired at once on the camera side.
  • the camera and the exchange are performed via the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal.
  • the camera after acquiring the information on the accessory and the information on the interchangeable lens, the camera includes the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal.
  • the information on the status of the interchangeable lens is acquired from the interchangeable lens.
  • the extended communication terminal can be effectively used even after acquiring information about the accessory and the interchangeable lens.
  • the compatibility between the camera and the interchangeable lens can be determined easily and quickly.
  • System configuration diagram showing an example of an interchangeable lens camera system Front view of camera side mount Front view of lens side mount Block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the camera Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the power supply Block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the camera microcomputer Block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the interchangeable lens Block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the lens microcomputer Diagram showing electrical connection between camera and interchangeable lens Block diagram of functions related to compatibility determination provided for cameras and interchangeable lenses
  • a table showing the relationship between the output setting of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal and the detected polarity according to the support status for a specific function
  • System configuration diagram of second embodiment of interchangeable lens camera system The figure which shows the electrical constitution of the accessory Block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the accessory microcomputer
  • the interchangeable lens camera system includes at least one camera and at least one interchangeable lens.
  • FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing an example of an interchangeable lens camera system.
  • the camera system 1 shown in the figure includes a plurality of cameras 10 and a plurality of interchangeable lenses 100.
  • the plurality of cameras 10 are each composed of a digital camera.
  • Each camera 10 has different specifications or functions. For example, the effective number of pixels of the image sensor, settable shooting sensitivity, settable metering method, settable exposure control method, shutter type, settable shutter speed, number of continuous shots, settable focus mode, settable White balance is different.
  • Each camera 10 includes a common camera-side mount 14. Therefore, the same interchangeable lens 100 can be attached to each camera 10.
  • the plurality of interchangeable lenses 100 are composed of lenses having different specifications. For example, the focal length, the presence or absence of a camera shake correction function, and the like are different.
  • Each interchangeable lens 100 includes a common lens side mount 104.
  • the lens side mount 104 has a structure corresponding to the camera side mount 14. Therefore, each interchangeable lens 100 can be attached to any camera 10.
  • FIG. 2 is a front view of the camera side mount.
  • Each camera 10 includes a camera-side mount 14 in the front portion of its camera body 12.
  • the camera side mount 14 is a mounting portion for the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the camera side mount 14 is configured by a known bayonet type mount. In FIG. 2, the direction indicated by the arrow R (clockwise direction) is the rotation direction of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10.
  • the camera side mount 14 is provided with a camera side terminal group CCG composed of a plurality of terminals CC1 to CC12.
  • the plurality of terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG are arranged at a constant interval on the circumference of one circle centered on the photographing optical axis.
  • the functions of the terminals CC1 to CC12 will be described later.
  • FIG. 3 is a front view of the lens side mount.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 includes a lens side mount 104 at the base end portion of the lens barrel 102.
  • the lens side mount 104 is constituted by a bayonet type mount corresponding to the camera side mount 14 provided in the camera 10.
  • the direction indicated by the arrow R (counterclockwise direction) is the rotation direction of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is mounted on the camera 10 (the lens-side mount 104 is mounted on the camera-side mount 14).
  • the lens side mount 104 is provided with a lens side terminal group LCG composed of a plurality of terminals LC1 to LC12.
  • the lens side terminal group LCG is provided corresponding to the camera side terminal group CCG. Accordingly, it is configured with the same number of terminals as the terminals constituting the camera side terminal group CCG, and the terminals LC1 to LC12 are arranged at the same intervals as the terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the terminals LC1 to LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG are connected to the corresponding terminals CC1 to CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG. That is, the first terminal LC1 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the first terminal CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG, and the second terminal LC2 of the lens side terminal group LCG is the second terminal CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the twelfth terminal LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the functions of the terminals LC1 to LC12 constituting the lens side terminal group LCG will be described later.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the camera.
  • the camera 10 includes an image sensor 16, a shutter 18, an image sensor drive unit 20, a shutter drive unit 22, an analog signal processing unit 24, a display unit 26, an image data storage unit 28, a camera operation unit 30, A power supply unit 32 and a camera microcomputer 34 are provided.
  • the image sensor 16 converts an optical image of a subject formed through the interchangeable lens into an electrical signal and outputs the electrical signal.
  • a known image sensor such as a CCD image sensor (CCD: Charged Coupled Device) or a CMOS image sensor (CMOS: Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) is used for the image sensor 16.
  • the image sensor drive unit 20 includes a drive circuit for the image sensor 16.
  • the image sensor driving unit 20 drives the image sensor 16 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the shutter 18 is an optical path opening / closing device that adjusts the exposure time for the image sensor 16.
  • the shutter 18 is constituted by, for example, a square-type focal plane shutter, and is disposed immediately before the image sensor 16.
  • the shutter drive unit 22 includes a drive circuit that drives a charge motor, an electromagnet, and the like provided in the shutter 18.
  • the shutter drive unit 22 drives a charge motor, an electromagnet, and the like according to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the analog signal processing unit 24 takes in an analog image signal output from the image sensor 16, performs predetermined signal processing (for example, correlated double sampling processing, amplification processing, etc.), and then converts it into a digital image signal. Output.
  • predetermined signal processing for example, correlated double sampling processing, amplification processing, etc.
  • the display unit 26 includes a monitor and its drive circuit.
  • the monitor is composed of, for example, an LCD (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) and is provided on the back of the camera body.
  • the image data storage unit 28 is a storage unit for captured image data.
  • the image data storage unit 28 includes a memory card and a socket for mounting the memory card. Reading and writing of image data to the memory card is controlled by the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the camera operation unit 30 is an operation unit of the camera 10 and includes various operation buttons and a circuit that detects an operation of the operation buttons and outputs an operation signal to the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the operation buttons provided on the camera 10 include a power button, a release button, and the like.
  • the power supply unit 32 generates and supplies power necessary for the operation of the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 under the control of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the power supply unit.
  • the power supply unit 32 includes a battery 40, a power supply unit 42, and a lens driving power switch unit 44.
  • the battery 40 is a power source for the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the battery 40 is detachably loaded in a battery chamber (not shown) provided in the camera body.
  • the power supply unit 42 generates various power sources necessary for the operation of the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 from the battery 40 under the control of the camera microcomputer 34 and supplies them to the respective units.
  • the power supply unit 42 is constituted by, for example, a DC-DC converter (DC: Direct / Current).
  • a plurality of lens driving power sources having different voltages are generated as power sources to be supplied to the interchangeable lens 100.
  • a first lens driving power supply LV1 having a voltage of + 5V
  • a second lens driving power supply LV2 having a voltage of + 6.5V
  • a third lens driving power supply having a voltage of + 10V.
  • the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage is supplied to the second terminal CC2 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the second lens driving power supply LV2 is supplied to the third terminal CC3 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage is supplied to the fourth terminal CC4 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the lens driving power switch unit 44 individually turns on and off the supply of the plurality of lens driving power sources LV1, LV2, and LV3 supplied from the power supply unit 42 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34. Thereby, the supply of the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, LV3 supplied from the power supply unit 42 to the plurality of terminals CC2, CC3, CC4 of the camera side terminal group CCG can be individually turned on / off.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 is a control unit of the camera 10 that performs overall control of the operation of the camera 10.
  • Camera microcomputer 34 CPU (CPU: Central Processing Unit), ROM (ROM: Read Only Memory), and RAM (RAM: Random Access Memory / memory capable of writing and reading data) ) And provide various functions by executing a prescribed program.
  • CPU Central Processing Unit
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • RAM Random Access Memory / memory capable of writing and reading data
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the camera microcomputer.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 executes a prescribed program, thereby performing a digital signal processing unit 50, a display control unit 52, a recording control unit 54, a power control unit 56, and a lens driving power switch control unit 58. , Function as a lens mounting detection unit 60, a camera communication unit 62, and the like.
  • the digital signal processing unit 50 takes in the digital image signal output from the analog signal processing unit 24 and performs predetermined signal processing to generate image data.
  • the display control unit 52 displays predetermined information on the monitor provided in the display unit 26. For example, when the playback mode is set, an image read from the memory card is displayed on the monitor. In addition, an image captured by the image sensor 16 when the shooting mode is set is displayed in real time. Furthermore, a setting screen is displayed on the monitor when performing various settings.
  • the recording control unit 54 reads / writes image data from / to the memory card mounted in the socket of the image data storage unit 28.
  • the power control unit 56 controls the power supply unit 42 to control the power supply to each unit.
  • the lens driving power switch control unit 58 controls the lens driving power switch unit 44 to control the supply of lens driving power.
  • the lens driving power supplies LV1 and LV2 supplied from the power supply unit 42 to a plurality of power terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the supply of LV3 is individually turned on and off to control the supply of power for driving the lens. Thereby, the lens driving power can be selectively supplied.
  • the lens mounting detection unit 60 detects the mounting of the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the lens mounting detection unit 60 detects the polarity of the lens detection port CP0 provided in the camera microcomputer input / output port 64 and determines whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 is mounted.
  • the camera communication unit 62 communicates with the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10. Communication is performed via the camera microcomputer input / output port 64.
  • the camera microcomputer input / output port 64 is provided with a plurality of communication ports CP1 to CP7 for communicating with the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the first communication port CP1 is a communication port for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the first communication port CP1 is used as a port for notifying that a predetermined function of the interchangeable lens 100 is operating. For example, it is used as a port for notifying that the aperture motor is operating.
  • the second communication port CP2 is a communication port for transmitting a VSYNC signal (VSYNC: Vertical SYNChronizing / vertical synchronization signal) from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
  • VSYNC Vertical SYNChronizing / vertical synchronization signal
  • the third communication port CP3, the fourth communication port CP4, and the fifth communication port CP5 are synchronized with the interchangeable lens 100 by three lines (hereinafter referred to as three-wire serial communication). ) For communication. Specifically, it is a communication port that constitutes an SPI (SPI: Serial Peripheral Interface) that is a synchronous serial communication interface.
  • SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
  • the third communication port CP3 is a communication port (MOSI port (MOSI: Master-Out-Slave-In)) for transmitting a signal from the camera 10 as the SPI master to the interchangeable lens 100 as the SPI slave.
  • MOSI port MOSI: Master-Out-Slave-In
  • the fourth communication port CP4 is a communication port (SCK port (SCK: Serial ClocK)) for transmitting a synchronization clock signal from the camera 10 as the SPI master to the interchangeable lens 100 as the SPI slave. is there.
  • the fifth communication port CP5 is a communication port (MISO port (MISO: Master-In-Slave-Out)) for transmitting a signal from the interchangeable lens 100 as the SPI slave to the camera 10 as the SPI master.
  • the fifth communication port CP5 is configured to be capable of open drain output. This point will be described later.
  • the sixth communication port CP6 is also a communication port for performing serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, and is a communication port for performing unidirectional serial communication. More specifically, it is a communication port for performing asynchronous serial communication (hereinafter referred to as single-wire serial communication) using a single line, and is a communication port that constitutes a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Receiver Transmitter).
  • the sixth communication port CP6 functions as an RXD port (RXD: Received eXchange Data) and receives a signal transmitted from the interchangeable lens 100. Used as a communication port.
  • the seventh communication port CP7 is a communication port for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the camera communication unit 62 When the camera communication unit 62 performs three-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100 using the third communication port CP3, the fourth communication port CP4, and the fifth communication port CP5, Make the necessary settings to establish the communication. That is, the camera communication unit 62 also functions as a camera side communication setting unit.
  • each camera can further have individual functions.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical main configuration of the interchangeable lens.
  • the figure shows the electrical configuration of an interchangeable lens having an AF mechanism (AF: Auto / Focus) and an aperture.
  • AF Auto / Focus
  • the interchangeable lens 100 includes a lens driving unit 110, a lens-side system power generation unit 112, and a lens microcomputer 114.
  • the lens driving unit 110 drives an optical member constituting the interchangeable lens 100 in accordance with an instruction from the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 shown in FIG. 7 has an AF function and a diaphragm.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 of this example includes a focus driving unit 110A and a diaphragm driving unit 110C as the lens driving unit 110.
  • the focus driving unit 110A drives a focus lens 106A that is an optical member for focusing.
  • the focus drive unit 110A includes a focus motor (for example, an ultrasonic motor) for driving the focus lens, and a drive circuit thereof.
  • the focus drive unit 110A drives the focus motor in response to an instruction from the lens microcomputer 114 to operate the focus lens 106A.
  • the aperture driving unit 110C drives an aperture that is an optical member for adjusting the amount of light.
  • the aperture drive unit 110C includes an aperture motor for driving the aperture 106C and a drive circuit thereof.
  • the aperture driving unit 110C drives the aperture motor in response to an instruction from the lens microcomputer 114 to operate the aperture 106C.
  • the lens driving unit 110 includes a plurality of lens driving power supplies LV1 (+ 5V), LV2 (+ 6.5V) having different voltages from a plurality of terminals LC2 to LC4 (power supply terminals) of the lens side terminal group LCG.
  • LV3 (+ 10V) is supplied. Any one of the plurality of lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 supplied to each driving unit of the lens driving unit 110 is supplied.
  • the third lens driving power source LV3 having the highest voltage is supplied to the focus driving unit 110A, and the first lens driving power source LV1 having the lowest voltage is supplied to the aperture driving unit 110C.
  • the lens side system power generation unit 112 generates a system power for operating the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the lens-side system power generation unit 112 uses the lens driving power supplied from the camera 10 to generate a system power.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 is configured to operate at a voltage lower than that of each driving unit included in the lens driving unit 110. For example, it is configured to operate at + 3.3V.
  • the lens-side system power supply generation unit 112 uses the lowest lens drive power supply LV1 (+ 5V) among the plurality of lens drive power supplies LV1 to LV3 supplied from the camera 10 to generate a system power supply (+ 3.3V). It is generated and supplied to the lens microcomputer 114. At this time, the lens-side system power supply generation unit 112 generates a system power supply by a voltage drop due to resistance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of noise accompanying the generation of the system power supply.
  • An LDO regulator can be exemplified as a device that generates a system power supply by a voltage drop due to resistance.
  • the LDO regulator is one of linear regulators, and converts it into a desired output voltage by consuming input power by using on-resistance of switching elements such as a power MOSFET and a power transistor.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 is a control unit of the interchangeable lens 100 that performs overall control of the operation of the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 controls the operation of the interchangeable lens 100 based on an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and provides various functions by executing a prescribed program. In addition to various programs executed by the CPU, various data necessary for control are stored in the ROM.
  • FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the lens microcomputer.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 functions as a focus drive control unit 120, an aperture drive control unit 124, a lens communication unit 126, and the like by executing a prescribed program.
  • the focus drive control unit 120 controls the focus drive unit 110A and operates the focus lens 106A in accordance with an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the aperture drive control unit 124 controls the aperture drive unit 110C and operates the aperture 106C in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the lens communication unit 126 communicates with the camera 10 to which the interchangeable lens 100 is attached. Communication is performed via the lens microcomputer input / output port 128.
  • the lens microcomputer input / output port 128 includes a plurality of communication ports LP1 to LP7 for communicating with the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the communication ports LP1 to LP7 are provided corresponding to the plurality of communication ports CP1 to CP7 provided in the camera microcomputer input / output port 64 of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the first communication port LP1 is used for notification of the state of the camera 10
  • the second communication port LP2 is used for receiving a VSYNC signal transmitted from the camera 10.
  • the third communication port LP3, the fourth communication port LP4, and the fifth communication port LP5 are used for three-wire serial communication with the camera 10.
  • the fifth communication port LP5 is configured to be capable of open drain output. This point will be described later.
  • the sixth communication port LP6 is a communication port for performing single-line serial communication with the camera 10, and is a communication port constituting the UART.
  • the sixth communication port LP6 is used as a TXD port (TXD: TransmitTranseXchange Data / data transmission). That is, it is used as a communication port for transmitting a signal to the camera 10.
  • the seventh communication port LP7 is used for notification of a state to the camera 10.
  • the lens communication unit 126 When the lens communication unit 126 performs three-wire serial communication with the camera 10 using the third communication port LP3, the fourth communication port LP4, and the fifth communication port LP5, Make the settings necessary to establish communication. That is, the lens communication unit 126 also functions as a lens side communication setting unit.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 can include, for example, a camera shake correction mechanism in addition to the above basic configuration.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an electrical connection between the camera and the interchangeable lens.
  • the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are electrically connected via a camera side terminal group CCG provided in the camera side mount 14 and a lens side terminal group LCG provided in the lens side mount 104. Is done.
  • the direction indicated by the arrow R is the rotation direction of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the lens side terminal group LCG moves in the direction indicated by the arrow R in FIG. 9 with respect to the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the camera side terminal group CCG is composed of 12 terminals CC1 to CC12. Each of the terminals CC1 to CC12 has the same shape and is arranged at a constant interval on the same circumference.
  • the first terminal CC1 is a lens detection terminal for detecting the mounting of the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the first terminal CC1 is connected to the lens detection port CP0 of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the first terminal CC1 is connected to the power supply unit 42 (see FIG. 5) via the pull-up resistor CR1 and pulled up to a predetermined potential (for example, +3.3 V).
  • the second terminal CC2, the third terminal CC3, and the fourth terminal CC4 are a plurality of power supply terminals for supplying a plurality of lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 to the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the second terminal CC2 is a first power supply terminal for supplying the first lens driving power supply LV1 to the interchangeable lens.
  • the second terminal CC2 is connected to the power supply unit 42 via the lens driving power switch unit 44 (see FIG. 5).
  • the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage is supplied from the power supply section 42 to the second terminal CC2.
  • the lens driving power switch unit 44 turns on and off the supply of the first lens driving power supply LV1 to the second terminal CC2 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the third terminal CC3 is a second power supply terminal for supplying the second lens driving power supply LV2 to the interchangeable lens.
  • the third terminal CC3 is connected to the power supply unit 42 via the lens driving power switch unit 44 (see FIG. 5).
  • a second lens driving power supply LV2 is supplied from the power supply unit 42 to the third terminal CC3.
  • the lens driving power switch 44 turns on / off the supply of the second lens driving power LV2 to the third terminal CC3 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the fourth terminal CC4 is a third power supply terminal for supplying the third lens driving power supply LV3 to the interchangeable lens.
  • the fourth terminal CC4 is connected to the power supply unit 42 via the lens driving power switch unit 44 (see FIG. 5).
  • the fourth lens CC4 is supplied with the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage from the power supply unit.
  • the lens driving power switch unit 44 turns on / off the supply of the third lens driving power supply LV3 to the fourth terminal CC4 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
  • (C) Fifth terminal CC5 and sixth terminal CC6 The fifth terminal CC5 and the sixth terminal CC6 are ground terminals, and are both grounded.
  • the seventh terminal CC7 to the twelfth terminal CC12 are communication terminals for communicating with the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the seventh terminal CC7 is a communication terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the seventh terminal CC7 is connected to the first communication port CP1 of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the first communication port CP1 of the camera microcomputer 34 is used to notify that a predetermined function of the interchangeable lens 100 is in operation.
  • the eighth terminal CC8 is a communication terminal for transmitting a VSYNC signal from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the eighth terminal CC8 is connected to the second communication port CP2 of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the ninth terminal CC9, the tenth terminal CC10, and the eleventh terminal CC11 are communication terminals for performing three-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, respectively.
  • the ninth terminal CC9 is connected to the third communication port CP3 (MOSI port) of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the tenth terminal CC10 is connected to the fourth communication port CP4 (SCK port) of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the eleventh terminal CC11 is connected to the fifth communication port CP5 (MISO port) of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is configured by a port capable of open drain output. Therefore, the eleventh terminal CC11 connected to the fifth communication port CP5 (MISO port) of the camera microcomputer 34 is configured as a terminal capable of open drain output.
  • the eleventh terminal CC11 is an example of a camera-side communication terminal. Based on the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11, it is determined whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10 corresponds to a specific function. Is done. This will be described in detail later.
  • the ninth terminal CC9, the tenth terminal CC10, and the eleventh terminal CC11 are examples of a plurality of terminals used when the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 perform serial communication.
  • the twelfth terminal CC12 is an example of a camera side extended communication terminal.
  • the twelfth terminal CC12 is a terminal for performing single-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, and the twelfth terminal CC12 is a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. is there.
  • the twelfth terminal CC12 is connected to the sixth communication port CP6 and the seventh communication port CP7 of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the plurality of terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG are the first terminal CC1, the second terminal CC2, and the rotation direction R of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10. ..., the eleventh terminal CC11 and the twelfth terminal CC12 are arranged in this order. Accordingly, the camera-side terminal group CCG includes a lens detection terminal (first terminal CC1), a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2 to fourth terminal CC4), and a plurality of ground terminals (fifth terminal CC5 and fifth terminal CC5). 6 terminals CC6) and a plurality of communication terminals (seventh terminal CC7 to twelfth terminal CC12).
  • the lens side terminal group LCG corresponds to the camera side terminal group CCG. Accordingly, it is configured with the same number of terminals as the terminals constituting the camera side terminal group CCG, and the terminals LC1 to LC12 are arranged at the same intervals as the terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the first terminal LC1 is a lens detection terminal corresponding to the lens detection terminal (first terminal CC1) on the camera side. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the first terminal LC1 is connected to the first terminal CC1 on the camera side.
  • the first terminal LC1 is grounded via the pull-down resistor LR1, and is pulled down to the ground potential.
  • the second terminal LC2, the third terminal LC3, and the fourth terminal LC4 are a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) on the camera side. Power supply terminal. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the second terminal LC2 is connected to the second terminal CC2 on the camera side, and the third terminal LC3 is connected to the third terminal CC3 on the camera side. .
  • the fourth terminal LC4 is connected to the camera-side fourth terminal CC4.
  • the second terminal CC2 on the camera side is a first power supply terminal for supplying the first lens driving power supply LV1 (+5 V) having the lowest voltage. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage is supplied to the second terminal LC2.
  • the lens side system power generation unit 112 is connected to the second terminal LC2 in the interchangeable lens.
  • the lens-side system power supply generation unit 112 generates a system power supply (+3.3 V) using the first lens driving power supply LV1 (+5 V) supplied from the second terminal LC2, and supplies the system power supply to the lens microcomputer 114. To do.
  • the third terminal CC3 on the camera side is a second power supply terminal for supplying a second lens driving power supply LV2 (+6.5 V). Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the second lens driving power supply LV2 is supplied to the third terminal LC3.
  • the fourth terminal CC4 on the camera side is a third power supply terminal for supplying the lens driving power supply LV3 (+ 10V) having the highest voltage. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage is supplied to the fourth terminal CC4 on the camera side.
  • the fifth terminal LC5 and the sixth terminal LC6 are two ground terminals corresponding to two ground terminals (fifth terminal CC5 and sixth terminal CC6) on the camera side, respectively. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the fifth terminal LC5 is connected to the fifth terminal CC5 on the camera side, and the sixth terminal LC6 is connected to the sixth terminal CC6 on the camera side.
  • the seventh terminal LC7 to the twelfth terminal LC12 are a plurality of communication terminals corresponding to the plurality of communication terminals on the camera side (seventh terminal CC7 to twelfth terminal CC12). Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the seventh terminal LC7 is connected to the camera-side seventh terminal CC7, and the eighth terminal LC8 is connected to the camera-side eighth terminal CC8.
  • the ninth terminal LC9 is connected to the camera-side ninth terminal CC9, and the tenth terminal LC10 is connected to the camera-side tenth terminal CC10. Further, the eleventh terminal LC11 is connected to the eleventh terminal CC11 on the camera side, and the twelfth terminal LC12 is connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 on the camera side.
  • the seventh terminal CC7 on the camera side is a communication terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. Accordingly, the seventh terminal LC7 is also used as a communication terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the seventh terminal LC7 is connected to the first communication port LP1 of the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the camera-side eighth terminal CC8 is a communication terminal for transmitting a VSYNC signal from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100. Therefore, the eighth terminal LC8 is used as a communication terminal for receiving the VSYNC signal transmitted from the camera side.
  • the eighth terminal LC8 is connected to the second communication port LP2 of the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the camera-side ninth terminal CC9, tenth terminal CC10, and eleventh terminal CC11 are communication terminals for performing three-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, respectively. Accordingly, the ninth terminal LC9, the tenth terminal LC10, and the eleventh terminal LC11 are also used as communication terminals for performing three-wire serial communication with the camera 10.
  • the ninth terminal LC9 is connected to the third communication port LP3 of the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the tenth terminal LC10 is connected to the fourth communication port LP4 of the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the eleventh terminal LC11 is connected to the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is configured by a port capable of open drain output. Therefore, the eleventh terminal LC11 connected to the fifth communication port LP5 (MISO port) of the lens microcomputer 114 is configured as a terminal capable of open drain output.
  • the eleventh terminal LC11 is an example of a lens side communication terminal, and based on the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11, it is determined whether or not the attached camera 10 is compatible with a specific function. This will be described in detail later.
  • the ninth terminal LC9, the tenth terminal LC10, and the eleventh terminal LC11 are examples of a plurality of terminals used when the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 perform serial communication.
  • the camera-side twelfth terminal CC12 is a terminal for performing single-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, and is a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. Accordingly, the twelfth terminal LC12 also functions as a terminal for performing single-wire serial communication with the camera 10 and a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state.
  • the twelfth terminal LC12 is connected to the sixth communication port LP6 and the seventh communication port LP7 of the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the twelfth terminal LC12 is an example of a lens side extended communication terminal.
  • the seventh terminal LC7, the eighth terminal LC8 and the twelfth terminal LC12 are Are connected to the lens-side system power generation unit 112 via the pull-up resistors LR7, LR8, and LR12, respectively, and are pulled up to the potential of the system power supply (for example, +3.3 V) supplied from the lens-side system power generation unit 112.
  • the system power supply for example, +3.3 V
  • the ninth terminal LC9 among the plurality of terminals (seventh terminal LC7 to twelfth terminal LC12) constituting the communication terminal is grounded via the pull-down resistor LR9 and pulled down to the ground potential.
  • the plurality of terminals LC1 to LC12 constituting the lens side terminal group LCG are also arranged in the same arrangement as the plurality of terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG. That is, the first terminal LC1, the second terminal LC2,..., The eleventh terminal LC11, and the twelfth terminal LC12 with respect to the rotation direction R of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10. Arranged in order. Therefore, the lens side terminal group LCG also includes a lens detection terminal (first terminal LC1), a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4), and a plurality of ground terminals (fifth terminal LC5 and sixth terminal LC5). Terminal LC6) and a plurality of communication terminals (seventh terminal LC7 to twelfth terminal LC12) in this order.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram of functions related to compatibility determination provided in the camera and the interchangeable lens.
  • the eleventh terminal CC11 functions as a camera-side communication terminal, and the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10 has a specific function based on the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11. It is determined whether or not
  • the function to be determined is determined in advance.
  • the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12) are used to connect the camera 10 to the camera 10.
  • a function for transmitting lens information is determined.
  • the interchangeable lens is used by using the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12).
  • Lens information is transmitted from 100 to the camera 10 by single-wire serial communication.
  • the camera 10 receives the transmitted lens information and acquires the lens information of the attached interchangeable lens 100. This will be described in detail later.
  • the eleventh terminal CC11 is connected to the fifth communication port CP5 (MISO port) of the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the fifth communication port CP5 is a port capable of open drain output.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 has a function of setting the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity or the LOW level that is the second polarity. This function is provided by the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit 70.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 functions as the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit 70 by executing a predetermined program. When the camera 10 supports a specific function, the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit 70 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity. On the other hand, when the camera 10 does not support a specific function, the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is set to the LOW level that is the second polarity.
  • the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the camera microcomputer 34 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5, and determines whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10 corresponds to a specific function based on the detected polarity. It has a function. This function is provided by the camera side determination unit 72.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 functions as the camera side determination unit 72 by executing a predetermined program.
  • the camera side determination unit 72 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5, and the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10 has a specific function only when the detected polarity is HIGH level (first polarity). Judge that it corresponds.
  • the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is set to the HIGH level (first polarity) by setting the eleventh terminal CC11 to the HIGH level (first polarity). Further, by setting the eleventh terminal CC11 to the LOW level (second polarity), the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the eleventh terminal LC11 functions as a lens-side communication terminal, and the camera 10 as the mounting destination corresponds to a specific function based on the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11. It is determined whether or not.
  • the eleventh terminal LC11 is connected to the fifth communication port LP5 (MISO port) of the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the fifth communication port LP5 is a port capable of open drain output.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 has a function of setting the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity or the LOW level that is the second polarity. This function is provided by the lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit 130.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 functions as the lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit 130 by executing a predetermined program.
  • the lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit 130 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity.
  • the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is set to the LOW level that is the second polarity.
  • the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the lens microcomputer 114 has a function of detecting the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 and determining whether or not the attached camera 10 is compatible with a specific function based on the detected polarity. This function is provided by the lens side determination unit 132.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 functions as the lens side determination unit 132 by executing a predetermined program.
  • the lens-side determination unit 132 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5, and only when the detected polarity is the HIGH level (first polarity), the camera 10 as the attachment destination corresponds to a specific function. Is determined.
  • the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the HIGH level (first polarity), so that the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is set to the HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 and the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 are capable of open drain output, and are each at a HIGH level (first polarity) or When set to the LOW level (second polarity), the polarity is set as follows. That is, both are set to HIGH level (first polarity) only when both are set to HIGH level (first polarity), and both are set to LOW when at least one is set to LOW level (second polarity). Level (second polarity).
  • both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 correspond to a specific function. It can be determined whether or not compatibility is achieved.
  • FIG. 11 is a table showing the relationship between the output settings of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal and the detected polarity in accordance with the corresponding status of a specific function.
  • the camera side communication terminal (eleventh terminal CC11) and the lens side communication terminal (eleventh terminal LC11) are connected.
  • the output setting is set to HIGH level (first polarity).
  • the output settings of the camera side communication terminal (11th terminal CC11) and the lens side communication terminal (11th terminal LC11) are set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • both the camera side communication terminal (11th terminal CC11) and the lens side communication terminal (11th terminal LC11) after the output setting are both set to HIGH level (first polarity).
  • first polarity HIGH
  • second polarity HIGH
  • whether or not the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are compatible can be determined by detecting the polarities of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10 by attaching the lens side mount 104 provided in the interchangeable lens 100 to the camera side mount 14 provided in the camera 10. At this time, the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated and attached to the camera 10.
  • the lens side terminal group LCG provided in the lens side mount 104 is connected to the camera side terminal group CCG provided in the camera side mount 14.
  • the lens side terminal group LCG includes a lens detection terminal (first terminal LC1) and a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4) along the rotation direction. ), A plurality of ground terminals (fifth terminal LC5 and sixth terminal LC6), and a plurality of communication terminals (seventh terminal LC7 to twelfth terminal LC12) are arranged in this order. More terminals LC2 to LC4) can be brought into contact with the terminals of the camera side terminal group CCG. Thereby, the self-cleaning effect of the plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4) of the lens side terminal group LCG can be improved. As a result, the contact resistance of the plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4) of the lens side terminal group LCG can be reduced, and power can be supplied efficiently.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 detects whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 is attached based on the polarity of the first terminal (lens detection terminal) CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the first terminal CC1 on the camera side is pulled up by the pull-up resistor CR1, and as a result, becomes a HIGH level (high potential).
  • the first terminal CC1 on the interchangeable lens side (lens detection terminal) LC1 is connected to the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. . Since the first terminal LC1 on the interchangeable lens side is grounded, when the first terminal LC1 on the interchangeable lens side is connected to the first terminal CC1 on the camera side, the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. Becomes LOW level (low potential).
  • the camera microcomputer 34 detects whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 is attached based on the polarity (HIGH level or LOW level) of the lens detection port CP0 connected to the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. That is, when the potential of the lens detection port CP0 is HIGH level, it is determined that the interchangeable lens 100 is not attached. When the potential of the lens detection port CP0 is LOW level, the interchangeable lens 100 is attached. It is determined that the interchangeable lens 100 is attached.
  • the first terminal CC1 which is a lens detection terminal, is arranged at the head in the rotation direction R of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 is attached or detached, it is possible to prevent the terminals other than the first terminal LC1 on the interchangeable lens side from coming into contact with the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. Thereby, erroneous detection can be prevented.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 When the camera microcomputer 34 detects that the interchangeable lens 100 is attached, the camera microcomputer 34 causes the power supply unit 42 to start supplying the lens driving power. That is, the power supply unit 42 and the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) on the camera side.
  • the lens driving power switch 44 is controlled. Accordingly, the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to the plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) on the camera side, respectively.
  • lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) on the camera side, a plurality of camera side power supplies are supplied.
  • a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2, third terminal LC3, and fourth terminal) on the interchangeable lens side connected to power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4).
  • the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to the interchangeable lens 100 via LC4).
  • a system power supply for the lens microcomputer 114 is generated using one of them.
  • the system power supply of the lens microcomputer 114 is generated by the lens side system power generation unit 112.
  • the lens-side system power supply generation unit 112 uses the first lens drive power supply LV1 (+ 5V) having the lowest voltage among the plurality of lens drive power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 supplied from the camera side, and uses the system power supply. (+3.3 V) is generated and supplied to the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 When the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114, the lens microcomputer 114 is activated.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 detects that the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114 based on the polarity of a specific terminal of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the specific terminal here is a terminal connected to a terminal to which a pull-up resistor is connected on the interchangeable lens side.
  • the terminals to which the pull-up resistors LR7, LR8, LR12 are connected are the seventh terminal LC7, the eighth terminal LC8, and the twelfth terminal LC12.
  • the camera-side terminals connected to these terminals are the seventh terminal CC7, the eighth terminal CC8, and the twelfth terminal CC12.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 includes a first communication port CP1 connected to the seventh terminal CC7 of the camera side terminal group CCG, and a second communication port CP2 connected to the eighth terminal CC8 of the camera side terminal group CCG. And the polarity (HIGH level or LOW level) of the sixth communication port CP6 connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG is discriminated, and the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114. Detect that. Specifically, when it is detected that the polarities of the first communication port CP1, the second communication port CP2, and the sixth communication port CP6 are HIGH levels, the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 switches the polarity of the first communication port LP1 to the LOW level.
  • the polarities of the seventh terminal LC7 on the interchangeable lens side and the seventh terminal CC7 on the camera side are switched from HIGH level to LOW level.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 detects that the seventh terminal CC7 is switched to the LOW level, and detects that the lens microcomputer 114 is activated. That is, the lens microcomputer 114 notifies the camera microcomputer 34 that it has started normally by switching the polarity of the first communication port LP1 to the LOW level.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 switches the polarity of the first communication port LP1 to the LOW level after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 determines whether the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is a regular interchangeable lens based on the polarity of a specific terminal of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the specific terminal here is a terminal connected to the terminal to which the pull-up resistors LR7, LR8, and LR12 are connected and a terminal to which the pull-down resistor LR9 is connected on the interchangeable lens side.
  • the terminals to which the pull-up resistors LR7, LR8, LR12 are connected are the seventh terminal LC7, the eighth terminal LC8, and the twelfth terminal LC12.
  • the camera-side terminals connected to these terminals are the seventh terminal CC7, the eighth terminal CC8, and the twelfth terminal CC12.
  • the terminal to which the pull-down resistor LR9 is connected is the ninth terminal LC9.
  • the camera-side terminal connected to this terminal is a ninth terminal CC9.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 includes a first communication port CP1 connected to the seventh terminal CC7 of the camera side terminal group CCG, and a second communication port CP2 connected to the eighth terminal CC8 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the polarities of the third communication port CP3 connected to the ninth terminal CC9 of the camera side terminal group CCG and the sixth communication port CP6 connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG (HIGH level or LOW level) is determined, and it is determined whether or not the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is a regular interchangeable lens.
  • the polarity of the first communication port CP1, the second communication port CP2, and the sixth communication port CP6 is HIGH
  • the polarity of the third communication port CP3 is LOW.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 When the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, it is determined whether or not the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are compatible. That is, it is determined whether or not the other party supports a specific function in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the camera is connected from the interchangeable lens 100 to the camera using the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12).
  • a function for transmitting lens information to 10 is set as a function to be determined, and whether or not the function is supported is determined.
  • the specific function to be determined is referred to as a lens information acquisition function. The determination is performed according to the following procedure.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 functioning as the camera-side communication terminal polarity setting unit 70 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 at the timing when the supply of lens driving power to the interchangeable lens 100 is started.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 to the LOW level that is the second polarity.
  • the eleventh terminal CC11 which is the camera side communication terminal is set to HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the lens microcomputer 114 functioning as the lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit 130 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 at the start timing. As described above, since the lens microcomputer 114 is activated when the power is normally supplied, the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is set at the activation timing. More specifically, the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is set after the activation but before notifying the camera side of the activation.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 to the LOW level that is the second polarity.
  • the eleventh terminal LC11 that is the lens side communication terminal is set to HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the camera microcomputer 34 functioning as the camera-side determination unit 72 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 (the eleventh terminal CC11) at the timing at which it is detected that the lens microcomputer 114 is activated, and determines whether there is compatibility. judge. Specifically, the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is detected at the timing when it is detected that the first communication port CP1 is switched to the LOW level, and the compatibility is determined.
  • the fifth communication port CP5 becomes the HIGH level only when the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are set to the HIGH level in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the case where the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are set to the HIGH level in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 means that both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 support the lens information acquisition function. It is. Therefore, the camera microcomputer 34 determines that the attached interchangeable lens 100 is compatible with the lens information acquisition function when the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is HIGH.
  • the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is LOW level, it is determined that there is no compatibility. In the case of incompatibility, the camera side does not support the lens information acquisition function, the interchangeable lens side does not support the lens information acquisition function, or both the camera side and the interchangeable lens side are lenses. This is a case where the information acquisition function is not supported.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 functioning as the lens-side determining unit 132 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 (the eleventh terminal LC11) at the timing of notifying activation and determines the compatibility. Specifically, the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is detected at the timing of switching the first communication port LP1 to the LOW level, and the compatibility is determined.
  • the fifth communication port LP5 on the interchangeable lens side is at the HIGH level only when the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are set to the HIGH level in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the case where the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are set to the HIGH level in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 corresponds to the lens information acquisition function in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. It is the case. Therefore, when the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is HIGH level, the lens microcomputer 114 determines that the mounting destination camera 10 is compatible with the lens information acquisition function. On the other hand, when the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is LOW level, it is determined that there is no compatibility. In the case of incompatibility, the camera side does not support the lens information acquisition function, the interchangeable lens side does not support the lens information acquisition function, or both the camera side and the interchangeable lens side are lenses. This is a case where the information acquisition function is not supported.
  • the camera 10 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 (the eleventh terminal CC11) on the camera side and the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 (the eleventh terminal LC11) on the interchangeable lens side. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 is compatible.
  • the camera system 1 is composed of three cameras and three interchangeable lenses.
  • the three cameras are a first camera, a second camera, and a third camera
  • the three interchangeable lenses are a first interchangeable lens, a second interchangeable lens, and a third interchangeable lens.
  • the camera only the first camera corresponds to a specific function, and the other does not correspond to a specific function.
  • the interchangeable lens only the first interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function, and the other does not correspond to a specific function.
  • the polarity of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 becomes HIGH level only when the first camera and the first interchangeable lens are combined.
  • Other combinations that is, the first camera and the second interchangeable lens, the first camera and the third interchangeable lens, the second camera and the first interchangeable lens, the second camera and the second interchangeable lens, the second camera and the third interchangeable lens
  • the polarities of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are all set to the LOW level.
  • both the camera and the interchangeable lens detect the polarities of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5, it is possible to determine whether the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are compatible. Specifically, when the polarity of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 is HIGH in both the camera and the interchangeable lens, it can be determined that both the camera and the interchangeable lens are compatible with a specific function. On the other hand, when the polarity of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 is LOW in both the camera and the interchangeable lens, it can be determined that at least one of them does not correspond to a specific function. That is, it can be determined that there is no compatibility.
  • Lens information acquisition processing is performed by transmitting lens information from the interchangeable lens 100 to the camera 10 and receiving it by the camera 10.
  • the transmission of the lens information is performed by single-wire serial communication, and is performed using the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12).
  • the lens information is information indicating the specification of the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the lens information includes, for example, lens model data, lens characteristic data, lens characteristic correction data, and the like.
  • the lens model data includes the lens model name, focal length, open F value, manufacturer name, product ID (ID: Identification), and the like.
  • the lens characteristic data includes luminance shading data, color shading data, distortion data, aberration data, and the like.
  • the lens characteristic correction data includes luminance shading correction data, color shading correction data, distortion correction data, aberration correction data, and the like.
  • the lens information is stored in the ROM of the lens microcomputer 114.
  • the lens information acquisition process is performed according to the following procedure.
  • communication settings for performing single-wire serial communication are performed.
  • the communication settings are performed in order, and after the communication setting on the camera side is performed, the communication setting on the interchangeable lens side is performed.
  • the communication setting on the camera side is performed before the communication setting on the interchangeable lens side in order to ensure that the communication setting on the camera side is completed when the interchangeable lens starts communication.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 When the communication setting is completed, the lens microcomputer 114 outputs lens information from the sixth communication port LP6 (TXD port).
  • the lens information output from the sixth communication port LP6 of the lens microcomputer 114 is transmitted to the camera side via the twelfth terminal LC12 which is a lens side extended communication terminal.
  • the lens information transmitted to the camera side is received via the twelfth terminal CC12, which is a camera side extended communication terminal, and input to the sixth communication port CP6 (RXD port) of the camera microcomputer 34. Thereby, the lens information of the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is acquired on the camera side.
  • the acquired lens information is used for controlling the interchangeable lens 100 and the like.
  • Communication settings are performed in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. Specifically, various settings necessary for performing three-wire serial communication between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are performed.
  • the communication settings are performed in order, and after the communication settings on the interchangeable lens side are performed, the communication settings on the camera side are performed. More specifically, after a certain time (for example, 2.5 ms) has elapsed after the determination of compatibility, communication settings on the interchangeable lens side are performed, and when a certain time (for example, 2.5 ms) has elapsed, Communication settings on the camera side are performed. Thereby, the communication setting can be surely completed before the camera starts communication.
  • the camera system 1 according to the present embodiment performs three-wire serial communication with the camera as the SPI master and the interchangeable lens as the SPI slave. Accordingly, the camera side has a trigger for starting communication.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 performs various settings necessary for performing three-wire serial communication with the camera microcomputer 34 after a predetermined time has elapsed after determining compatibility. When a predetermined time further elapses, the camera microcomputer 34 performs various settings necessary for performing three-wire serial communication with the lens microcomputer 114.
  • This communication setting process is performed in parallel with the lens information acquisition process described above. Thereby, start-up can be speeded up.
  • the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12) are used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state of the interchangeable lens 100 from the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 When the transmission of the lens information is completed, the lens microcomputer 114 performs settings necessary for using the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12) as a communication terminal for status notification. Similarly, the camera microcomputer 34 performs setting in order to use the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) as a communication terminal for state notification.
  • the same processing is performed when the camera 10 or the interchangeable lens 100 does not support the lens information acquisition function. That is, settings necessary for use as a terminal for notifying the state of the interchangeable lens 100 are performed.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 communicates with the camera microcomputer 34 using a terminal for synchronous serial communication, and receives a drive instruction from the camera microcomputer 34. And according to the received instruction
  • the lens driving unit 110 operates by receiving power from the camera 10.
  • a plurality of lens driving power sources are supplied via a plurality of power source terminals (second terminal CC2 to fourth terminal CC4 on the camera side and second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4 on the interchangeable lens side).
  • the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 have different voltages from each other and are supplied to the corresponding driving units.
  • the first lens driving power supply LV1 (+ 5V) having the lowest voltage is supplied to the aperture driving unit 110C.
  • the third lens driving power supply LV3 (+10 V) having the highest voltage is supplied to the focus driving unit 110A.
  • power can be efficiently supplied by supplying power to the interchangeable lens through a plurality of power terminals.
  • the loss at the terminal portion increases.
  • the interchangeable lens is supplied via a plurality of power supply terminals, loss at the terminal portion can be reduced and power can be supplied efficiently. That is, by providing the interchangeable lens via a plurality of power supply terminals, the terminal area can be increased, and loss can be reduced and power can be supplied efficiently.
  • the number of power supply terminals increases, but in the camera system 1 of the present embodiment, the number of terminals for system power supply can be reduced, so that the increase in the number of terminals can also be suppressed.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 is supplied with a plurality of lens driving power sources having different voltages from the camera 10.
  • lens driving power sources are necessarily used, and only some lens driving power sources may be used.
  • a lens driving power supply other than the operating voltage is not used.
  • the voltage driving power required for the lens varies depending on the interchangeable lens. Based on the lens information acquired from the interchangeable lens 100, the camera microcomputer 34 determines a lens driving power source having a necessary voltage and causes the power supply unit 42 to supply only a lens driving power source having a necessary voltage. Specifically, the process is as follows.
  • a lens driving power source having a voltage necessary for the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is determined.
  • the ROM provided in the camera microcomputer 34 stores a determination table.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 refers to the determination table to determine the lens driving power source having a voltage required for the mounted interchangeable lens 100. .
  • information about a lens driving power source having a necessary voltage is recorded in association with each interchangeable lens (lens model name) constituting the camera system 1.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 controls the lens driving power switch unit 44 based on the determination result, and stops the supply of unused lens driving power on the interchangeable lens side. For example, when the second lens driving power source LV2 that is an intermediate voltage is unused on the interchangeable lens side, the supply of the second lens driving power source LV2 is stopped. As a result, only necessary lens driving power is supplied.
  • the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage is a lens driving power supply that is always used because it is used as the system power supply of the lens microcomputer 114. Accordingly, the supply is actually stopped for the second lens driving power supply LV2 which is an intermediate voltage or the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage.
  • the lens driving power source having the necessary voltage is determined with reference to the determination table provided on the camera side.
  • the lens driving power having the necessary voltage for the lens information transmitted from the interchangeable lens is used.
  • a power supply may be included.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated in the direction opposite to that when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached and is detached from the camera 10.
  • the power supply terminals (second terminal LC2, third terminal LC3 and fourth terminal LC4) of the interchangeable lens 100 are connected to the ground terminals (fifth terminal LC5 and sixth terminal LC6) of the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the replacement lens 100 can be safely removed by being arranged on the rear side in the rotation direction (the front side with respect to the rotation direction R when the interchangeable lens 100 is mounted).
  • the power supply terminal is disposed adjacent to the rear side of the ground terminal with respect to the rotation direction when the interchangeable lens 100 is removed, when the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated in the removal direction, the interchangeable lens 100 is immediately after.
  • the power supply terminal is in contact with the ground terminal of the camera 10. That is, the power supply terminal of the interchangeable lens 100 is in contact with the ground terminal of the camera 10 without touching other terminals. Thereby, the charge remaining on the power supply terminal and its wiring can be appropriately processed, and the interchangeable lens 100 can be safely removed.
  • the plurality of power terminals are arranged in order of increasing voltage with respect to the rotation direction when the interchangeable lens 100 is removed (in order of decreasing voltage relative to the rotation direction R when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached).
  • the charge remaining on the interchangeable lens side can be appropriately processed. That is, when the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated to remove, the interchangeable lens-side power terminal always comes into contact with the camera-side power supply terminal or ground terminal that supplies power having a higher voltage than itself. Even if electric charges remain in the power supply terminal and its wiring on the side, it can be appropriately processed. Thereby, the interchangeable lens 100 can be removed safely.
  • FIG. 12 is a system configuration diagram of a second embodiment of the interchangeable lens camera system.
  • the camera system 1 further includes an accessory 200 that is detachably mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100.
  • At least one accessory 200 is provided.
  • two accessories 200 are provided.
  • the accessory 200 is composed of, for example, an extender and an extension tube.
  • the two accessories 200 are both constituted by extenders.
  • the accessory 200 is provided with an extender lens in its lens barrel.
  • One of the two accessories 200 is configured by an extender that extends the focal length by 1.4 times, and the other is configured by an extender that extends the focal length by two times.
  • the presence / absence of correspondence to a function communicating with the accessory 200 is determined as the presence / absence of correspondence to a specific function. That is, some cameras 10 and interchangeable lenses 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200, and both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 determine whether or not the functions are supported.
  • the accessory 200 includes an accessory-side first mount 204A on the proximal end side of the accessory body 202, and an accessory-side second mount 204B on the distal end side.
  • the accessory side first mount 204 ⁇ / b> A is a mount for mounting the accessory 200 to the camera 10.
  • the accessory-side first mount 204 ⁇ / b> A has the same structure as the lens-side mount 104 provided in the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the accessory side second mount 204 ⁇ / b> B is a mount for mounting the interchangeable lens 100 on the accessory 200.
  • the accessory-side second mount 204 ⁇ / b> B has the same structure as the camera-side mount 14 provided in the camera 10.
  • the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10 via the accessory-side first mount 204A.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the accessory-side second mount 204B of the accessory 200.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the accessory.
  • the accessory-side first mount 204A of the accessory 200 includes an accessory-side first terminal group A1CG including a plurality of terminals A1C1 to A1C12.
  • the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG is provided corresponding to the camera-side terminal group CCG. Therefore, it is configured with the same number of terminals as the terminals constituting the camera side terminal group CCG, and the terminals A1C1 to A1C12 are arranged at the same intervals as the terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the terminals A1C1 to A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG are connected to the corresponding terminals CC1 to CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG. That is, the first terminal A1C1 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG is connected to the first terminal CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG, and the second terminal A1C2 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG is the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG is connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
  • the first terminal A1C1 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG also constitutes a lens detection terminal.
  • the second terminal CC2, the third terminal CC3, and the fourth terminal CC4 of the camera side terminal group CCG constitute a power supply terminal, respectively, the second terminal A1C2, the second terminal A1C2, and the second terminal A1CG of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG.
  • the third terminal A1C3 and the fourth terminal A1C4 also constitute corresponding power supply terminals.
  • the second terminal A1C2 is a terminal that supplies the lowest voltage lens driving power source LV1
  • the fourth terminal A1C4 is a terminal that supplies the highest voltage lens driving power source LV3.
  • the third terminal A1C3 is a terminal that supplies the lens driving power supply LV2 having an intermediate voltage.
  • the fifth terminal CC5 and the sixth terminal CC6 of the camera side terminal group CCG constitute a ground terminal, respectively, the fifth terminal A1C5 and the sixth terminal A1C6 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG also respectively. Configure the corresponding ground terminal.
  • the seventh terminal CC7 to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG constitute a communication terminal, respectively, the seventh terminal A1C7 to the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG are also respectively provided. Configure the corresponding communication terminal.
  • the twelfth terminal A1C12 constitutes an accessory-side first extended communication terminal.
  • the twelfth terminal A1C12 is connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 which is a camera side extended communication terminal when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10.
  • the accessory-side second mount 204B of the accessory 200 includes an accessory-side second terminal group A2CG including a plurality of terminals A2C1 to A2C12.
  • the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG is provided corresponding to the lens-side terminal group LCG. Accordingly, it is configured with the same number of terminals as the terminals constituting the lens side terminal group LCG, and the terminals A2C1 to A2C12 are arranged at the same intervals as the terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the lens side terminal group LCG.
  • the terminals LC1 to LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG are connected to the corresponding terminals A2C1 to A2C12 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG. That is, the first terminal LC1 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the first terminal A2C1 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG, and the second terminal LC2 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the accessory side second terminal group A2CG.
  • the twelfth terminal LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG.
  • the first terminal A2C1 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG also constitutes a lens detection terminal.
  • the second terminal LC2, the third terminal LC3, and the fourth terminal LC4 of the lens side terminal group LCG constitute a power terminal, respectively, the second terminal A2C2, the second terminal A2C2, and the second terminal A2CG of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG.
  • the third terminal A2C3 and the fourth terminal A2C4 also constitute corresponding power supply terminals.
  • the second terminal A2C2 is a terminal that supplies the lowest voltage lens driving power supply LV1
  • the fourth terminal A2C4 is a terminal that supplies the highest voltage lens driving power supply LV3.
  • the third terminal A2C3 is a terminal that supplies a lens driving power supply LV2 having an intermediate voltage.
  • the fifth terminal LC5 and the sixth terminal LC6 of the lens side terminal group LCG constitute a ground terminal, respectively, the fifth terminal A2C5 and the sixth terminal A2C6 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG also respectively. Configure the corresponding ground terminal.
  • the seventh terminal LC7 to the twelfth terminal LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG respectively constitute communication terminals
  • the seventh terminal A2C7 to the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG are also respectively provided.
  • the twelfth terminal A2C12 constitutes an accessory-side second extended communication terminal.
  • the twelfth terminal A2C12 is connected to the twelfth terminal LC12 of the interchangeable lens 100 which is a lens side extended communication terminal when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached.
  • the first power supply terminal is configured in the second terminal A1C2 and the accessory second terminal group A2CG that configure the first power supply terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG.
  • the second terminals A2C2 are connected to each other by the second connection wiring AL2 constituting the accessory-side power line in the accessory.
  • the second connection wiring AL2 functions as a wiring for supplying the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the third terminal A1C3 constituting the second power supply terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the third terminal A2C3 constituting the second power supply terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG are accessories. They are connected to each other by the third connection wiring AL3 constituting the side power supply line. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the third terminal CC3 of the camera 10 and the third terminal LC3 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
  • the third connection wiring AL3 functions as a wiring for supplying the second lens driving power supply LV2 having an intermediate voltage from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the fourth terminal A1C4 constituting the third power supply terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the fourth terminal A2C4 constituting the third power supply terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG are accessories. They are connected to each other by a fourth connection wiring AL4 constituting the side power supply line. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the fourth terminal CC4 of the camera 10 and the fourth terminal LC4 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
  • the fourth connection wiring AL4 functions as a wiring for supplying the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
  • a 2nd ground terminal is comprised in 6th terminal A1C6 and 2nd accessory side 2nd terminal group A2CG which comprise a 2nd ground terminal in accessory side 1st terminal group A1CG.
  • the sixth terminals A2C6 are connected to each other by a sixth connection wiring AL6 constituting an accessory-side ground line in the accessory.
  • the fifth terminal A1C5 constituting the first ground terminal and the fifth terminal A2C5 constituting the first ground terminal in the accessory side second terminal group A2CG are respectively in the accessory.
  • the fifth connection wiring AL5A and AL5B are connected to the sixth connection wiring AL6.
  • the seventh terminal A1C7 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory side first terminal group A1CG and the seventh terminal A2C7 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory side second terminal group A2CG are: In the accessory, they are connected to each other by the seventh connection wiring AL7 constituting the accessory-side communication line. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the seventh terminal CC7 of the camera 10 and the seventh terminal LC7 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
  • the eighth terminal A1C8 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the eighth terminal A2C8 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG constitute the accessory-side communication line in the accessory. They are connected to each other by the eighth connection wiring AL8. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the eighth terminal CC8 of the camera 10 and the eighth terminal LC8 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
  • the ninth terminal A1C9 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the ninth terminal A2C9 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG constitute the accessory-side communication line in the accessory. They are connected to each other by a ninth connection wiring AL9. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the ninth terminal CC9 of the camera 10 and the ninth terminal LC9 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
  • the tenth terminal A1C10 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the tenth terminal A2C10 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG constitute the accessory-side communication line in the accessory. They are connected to each other by a tenth connection wiring AL10. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the tenth terminal CC10 of the camera 10 and the tenth terminal LC10 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
  • the eleventh terminal A1C11 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the eleventh terminal A2C11 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG constitute the accessory-side communication line in the accessory. They are connected to each other by an eleventh connection wiring AL11. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the eleventh terminal CC11 of the camera 10 and the eleventh terminal CC11 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
  • the ninth terminal, the tenth terminal, and the eleventh terminal are terminals used for three-wire serial communication
  • the ninth connection wiring AL9, the tenth connection wiring AL10, and the eleventh connection wiring are used.
  • AL11 is used for 3-wire serial communication.
  • the twelfth terminal A1C12 constituting the accessory side first extended communication terminal and the twelfth terminal A2C12 constituting the accessory side second extended communication terminal in the accessory side second terminal group A2CG are accessories.
  • the accessory microcomputer 210 controls the operation of the accessory 200.
  • the accessory microcomputer 210 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and provides various functions by executing a prescribed program. In addition to various programs executed by the CPU, various data necessary for control are stored in the ROM.
  • FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the accessory microcomputer.
  • the accessory microcomputer 210 functions as an accessory communication unit 212, a bypass control unit 214, and the like by executing a prescribed program.
  • the accessory communication unit 212 communicates with the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 to which the accessory 200 is attached. Communication is performed via the accessory microcomputer input / output port 216.
  • the accessory microcomputer input / output port 216 includes a first port AP1 and a second port AP2 for performing single-line serial communication between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the first port AP1 functions as a TXD port that outputs data.
  • the first port AP1 is connected to the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG via the twelfth connection wiring AL12A (see FIG. 13).
  • the second port AP2 functions as an RXD port that receives data.
  • the second port AP2 is connected to the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG via the twelfth connection wiring AL12B (see FIG. 13).
  • the camera microcomputer 34 and the accessory microcomputer 210 are communicably connected via the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG and the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG. Further, the lens microcomputer 114 and the accessory microcomputer 210 are communicably connected via the twelfth terminal LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG and the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG.
  • the bypass control unit 214 is a control unit that controls on / off of a bypass mechanism for the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 to communicate without going through the accessory microcomputer 210.
  • the bypass mechanism is configured as follows.
  • an accessory microcomputer 210 is provided between the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG.
  • the bypass line 232 is connected so as to avoid the above.
  • the bypass line 232 is connected to a first FET (FET: Field-Effect / Transistor / Field Effect Transistor) 234 as a first switch and a second FET 236 as a second switch.
  • FET Field-Effect / Transistor / Field Effect Transistor
  • the source terminal of the first FET 234 is connected to the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG via the bypass line 232.
  • the drain terminal is connected to the drain terminal of the second FET 236 via the bypass line 232.
  • the source terminal of the second FET 236 is connected to the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG via the bypass line 232.
  • each of the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 is connected to a wiring 238 that connects the second connection wiring AL2 and the sixth connection wiring AL6.
  • the third FET 240 as a third switch and a pull-up resistor 242 are connected to the wiring 238.
  • the second connection wiring AL2 functions as a wiring for supplying the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage, the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 connected to the wiring 238 , Each gate terminal is pulled up to the potential of the first lens driving power supply LV1.
  • the drain terminal of the third FET 240 is connected to the pull-up resistor 242 via the wiring 238.
  • the source terminal is connected to the sixth connection wiring AL6 through the wiring 238. Since the sixth connection wiring AL6 functions as a ground line, the source terminal of the third FET 240 is grounded.
  • the gate terminal of the third FET 240 is connected to the third port AP3 of the accessory microcomputer 210 via the wiring 244.
  • the accessory microcomputer 210 functioning as the bypass control unit 214 controls the polarity (HIGH level or LOW level) of the third port AP3 to control on / off of the bypass mechanism.
  • the third FET 240 as a switch when the third FET 240 as a switch is turned on, the gate terminals of the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 are set to the LOW level. Thereby, the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 as switches are turned off. As a result, the bypass line 232 is disconnected and the bypass mechanism is turned off.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 can communicate with each other via the accessory microcomputer 210. More specifically, the accessory microcomputer 210 and the camera microcomputer 34 are communicably connected, and the accessory microcomputer 210 and the lens microcomputer 114 are communicably connected.
  • the communication here is single-wire serial communication (unidirectional asynchronous serial communication using a single wire).
  • data is transmitted from the lens microcomputer 114 to the accessory microcomputer 210, and data is transmitted from the accessory microcomputer 210 to the camera microcomputer 34.
  • bypass mode In the bypass mode, the bypass mechanism is turned on. In this case, the accessory microcomputer 210 sets the polarity of the third port AP3 of the accessory microcomputer input / output port 216 to the LOW level. Thereby, the third FET 240 as a switch is turned off.
  • the third FET 240 as a switch when the third FET 240 as a switch is turned off, the gate terminals of the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 are set to the HIGH level. As a result, the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 as switches are turned on. As a result, the bypass line 232 is opened and the bypass mechanism is turned on.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 are set to communicate directly without going through the accessory microcomputer 210.
  • a system power supply for operating the accessory microcomputer 210 is generated by an accessory-side system power generation unit 250 provided in the accessory.
  • the accessory-side system power generation unit 250 generates the system power for the accessory microcomputer 210 using the lens driving power supplied from the camera 10, as with the lens-side system power generation unit 112 provided in the interchangeable lens 100. To do.
  • the accessory microcomputer 210 is configured to operate at a voltage lower than that of each driving unit that constitutes the lens driving unit 110 provided in the interchangeable lens 100. For example, it is configured to operate at + 3.3V.
  • the accessory-side system power supply generation unit 250 uses the lens drive power supply LV1 (+5 V) having the lowest voltage among the plurality of lens drive power supplies LV1 to LV3 supplied from the camera 10 to use the system power supply ( + 3.3V). For this reason, the accessory side system power generation unit 250 is connected to the second connection wiring AL2 connected to the second terminal which is a power supply terminal.
  • the accessory-side system power supply generation unit 250 also generates a system power supply by a voltage drop due to resistance, like the lens-side system power supply generation unit 112. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of noise accompanying the generation of the system power supply.
  • the accessory-side system power supply generation unit 250 is configured with, for example, an LDO regulator.
  • the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG is grounded via the pull-down resistor AR12 and pulled down to the ground potential.
  • the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the camera microcomputer 34 can detect that the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10 by detecting that the twelfth terminal CC12 is at the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the pull-down resistor AR12 connected to the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG has a larger resistance value than the pull-up resistor LR12 connected to the twelfth terminal LC12 of the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the pull-up resistor LR12 connected to the twelfth terminal LC12 of the interchangeable lens 100 is configured with 2.2 k ⁇
  • the pull-down resistor AR12 connected with the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG is configured with 220 k ⁇ .
  • the pull-up resistor LR12 connected to the twelfth terminal LC12 (lens side extended communication terminal) of the interchangeable lens 100 functions as a lens side extended communication terminal polarity setting unit
  • Pull-down resistor AR12 connected to the first side extended communication terminal functions as an accessory side first extended communication terminal polarity setting unit.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 functions as an accessory detection unit. The function as the accessory detection unit is provided by the camera microcomputer 34 executing a predetermined program.
  • the accessory microcomputer input / output port 216 of the accessory microcomputer 210 includes a fourth port AP4.
  • the fourth port AP4 functions as an input communication port and is connected to the seventh connection wiring AL7 via the wiring 260. Thereby, the information transmitted via the seventh connection wiring AL7 can be received by the accessory microcomputer 210.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the electrical connection when accessories are mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens.
  • the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10 by attaching the accessory-side first mount 204 ⁇ / b> A provided in the accessory 200 to the camera-side mount 14 provided in the camera 10. At this time, the accessory 200 is rotated and attached to the camera 10.
  • the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the accessory 200 by attaching the lens side mount 104 provided in the interchangeable lens 100 to the accessory side second mount 204B provided in the accessory 200. At this time, the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated and attached to the accessory 200.
  • the accessory 200 is mounted between the interchangeable lens 100 and the camera 10.
  • the lens side terminal group LCG of the interchangeable lens 100 is connected to the accessory side second terminal group A2CG of the accessory 200.
  • the camera side terminal group CCG of the camera 10 is connected to the accessory side first terminal group A1CG of the accessory 200.
  • (B) Second Terminal to Fourth Terminal By attaching the accessory 200, the second terminal CC2 of the camera 10 that is the first power supply terminal is connected via the second connection wiring AL2 of the accessory 200. , And electrically connected to the second terminal LC2 of the interchangeable lens 100. Further, the third terminal CC3 of the camera 10 which is the second power supply terminal is electrically connected to the third terminal LC3 of the interchangeable lens 100 via the third connection wiring AL3 of the accessory 200. Further, the fourth terminal CC4 of the camera 10 that is the third power supply terminal is electrically connected to the fourth terminal LC4 of the interchangeable lens 100 via the fourth connection wiring AL4 of the accessory 200.
  • the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 can be supplied from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
  • (C) Fifth Terminal and Sixth Terminal When the accessory 200 is attached, the fifth terminal CC5 and the sixth terminal CC6 of the camera 10 that are ground terminals are connected to the fifth connection wiring AL5A of the accessory 200. , AL5B and the sixth connection wiring AL6 can be electrically connected to the fifth terminal LC5 and the sixth terminal LC6 of the interchangeable lens 100.
  • the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 that is the camera side extended communication terminal is connected to the twelfth terminal A1C12 and the twelfth connection of the accessory 200 that is the accessory side first extended communication terminal. It is electrically connected to the accessory microcomputer 210 via the wiring AL12A.
  • the twelfth terminal LC12 of the interchangeable lens 100 that is the lens side extended communication terminal is connected to the accessory microcomputer 210 via the twelfth terminal A2C12 and the twelfth connection wiring AL12B of the accessory 200 that is the accessory side second extended communication terminal. And electrically connected.
  • communication between the camera microcomputer 34 and the accessory microcomputer 210 becomes possible, and communication between the lens microcomputer 114 and the accessory microcomputer 210 becomes possible.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 can detect the presence or absence of the accessory 200 by determining the polarity of the twelfth terminal CC12.
  • the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 is set to the LOW level.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 determines that the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10 by detecting that the twelfth terminal CC12 is at the LOW level.
  • the lens driving power supplies LV 1, LV 2, and LV 3 are supplied from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100, some of them are supplied to the accessory-side system power generation unit 250. Specifically, the first lens driving power supply LV 1 (+5 V) having the lowest voltage is supplied to the accessory-side system power generation unit 250. The accessory-side system power generation unit 250 generates the system power (+3.3 V) of the accessory microcomputer 210 using the supplied lens driving power LV1 and supplies the system power to the accessory microcomputer 210. As a result, the accessory microcomputer 210 is activated.
  • the accessory information is information indicating the specifications of the accessory 200.
  • the accessory information includes, for example, accessory model data, accessory mounting position data, optical correction data, and the like.
  • the accessory model data includes an accessory model name, an accessory type, a manufacturer name, a product ID, and the like.
  • the accessory mounting position data includes effective accessory mounting position data, mounting number data, and the like.
  • the optical correction data includes image correction data when an accessory is attached.
  • the accessory information is stored in the ROM of the accessory microcomputer 210.
  • the accessory 200 communicates with the camera microcomputer 34 and transmits accessory information to the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the accessory microcomputer 210 adds the accessory information to the lens information acquired in advance, and transmits the accessory information to the camera microcomputer 34. That is, the accessory microcomputer 210 communicates with the camera microcomputer 34 and communicates with the lens microcomputer 114 and acquires lens information from the lens microcomputer 114 before transmitting the accessory information to the camera microcomputer 34. Then, accessory information is added to the acquired lens information and transmitted to the camera microcomputer 34.
  • the specific determination method is the same as the method described in the first embodiment. That is, the polarities of the camera-side eleventh terminal CC11 that is the camera-side communication terminal and the eleventh terminal LC11 on the interchangeable lens side that is the lens-side communication terminal are detected, and are determined to be compatible when both are at the HIGH level. To do. That is, it is determined that both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200.
  • the polarity settings are as follows. That is, on the camera side, when the camera 10 has a function of communicating with the accessory 200, the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to the HIGH level (first polarity). On the other hand, when the camera 10 does not have the function of communicating with the accessory 200, the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity). On the interchangeable lens side, when the interchangeable lens 100 has a function of communicating with the accessory 200, the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to HIGH level (first polarity). On the other hand, when the interchangeable lens 100 does not have a function of communicating with the accessory 200, the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
  • the polarities of the eleventh terminals CC11 and LC11 become HIGH level (first polarity) only when both the mounted camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200.
  • the lens information and accessory information acquisition process is performed according to the following procedure.
  • the lens microcomputer 114 switches the lens from the sixth communication port LP6 (TXD port). Output information.
  • the lens information output from the sixth communication port LP6 of the lens microcomputer 114 is transmitted to the camera side via the twelfth terminal LC12 which is a lens side extended communication terminal.
  • the lens information transmitted to the camera side is received by the accessory microcomputer 210 via the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG of the accessory 200.
  • the accessory microcomputer 210 When the accessory microcomputer 210 receives lens information from the interchangeable lens 100, it adds its own accessory information to the lens information and transmits it to the camera 10.
  • the transmitted information (lens information + accessory information) is output from the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG of the accessory 200, and is received by the camera microcomputer 34 via the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10.
  • the camera 10 can acquire information of the attached accessory 200 and the interchangeable lens 100 at the same time.
  • Communication settings are performed in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 after determining compatibility.
  • the communication setting is performed in parallel with the lens information and accessory information acquisition process described above. Thereby, start-up can be speeded up.
  • the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12) are acquired.
  • the accessory 200 is switched to the bypass mode. Thereby, the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 can communicate directly, without going through the accessory 200.
  • the function to be determined is not particularly limited. The presence / absence of correspondence to a predetermined function is determined.
  • the lens information is transmitted from the lens to the camera, and the accessory information is added to the lens information to detect the presence and type of the accessory.
  • the configuration may be such that accessory detection data that does not include lens information is transmitted from the lens to the camera, and accessory information is added to the accessory detection data to detect the presence and type of the accessory.
  • lens information is acquired separately. For example, it is acquired by three-wire serial communication.
  • a transmission request for lens information is transmitted from the camera side to the lens side.
  • the lens side transmits lens information to the camera side.
  • both the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are configured as terminals capable of open drain output.
  • the configuration for enabling the compatibility determination based on this is not limited to this.
  • the same function can be realized by configuring both the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal with terminals capable of open collector output.
  • the same function can also be realized by configuring one of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal as a terminal capable of open drain output and configuring the other as a terminal capable of open collector output.
  • the power supply unit 42 may be configured to have a function of enhancing the supply capability of a specific power supply (supply capability enhancement function) so as to enhance the supply capability of the lens driving power supply.
  • the power supply unit 42 is configured to enhance the supply capability of the lens driving power source having the highest voltage among the plurality of lens driving power sources to be supplied.
  • an aspect in which the supplied voltage is increased and / or an amount in which the supplied current is increased can be employed.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 enhances the supply capability of the lens driving power source with the highest voltage as necessary. For example, when an interchangeable lens that can improve the driving performance by strengthening the supply capability of the lens driving power supply is mounted, the supply capability of the lens driving power supply with the highest voltage is strengthened.
  • the lens is an interchangeable lens that can improve the driving performance by strengthening the power supply capability of the lens driving power differs for each interchangeable lens.
  • the information is stored in the ROM of the lens microcomputer 114, and is included in the lens information and transmitted to the camera 10.
  • the camera microcomputer 34 determines, based on the acquired lens information, whether or not the mounted interchangeable lens is an interchangeable lens that can improve driving performance by enhancing the power supply capability of the lens driving power supply. That is, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to supply a lens driving power source with enhanced supply capability. Then, when it is determined that the lens driving power supply with enhanced supply capability is necessary, the supply capability enhancement function of the power supply unit 42 is operated. As a result, the power for driving the lens with the enhanced supply capability is supplied from the power supply unit 42. In this case, as described above, the lens driving power supply capability with the highest voltage is enhanced and supplied.
  • the camera is a digital camera, but the present invention can also be applied to a so-called silver salt camera.
  • an interchangeable lens having an AF function and an aperture has been described as an example of an interchangeable lens, but the function provided in the interchangeable lens is not limited to this.
  • an electric zoom function may be provided.
  • An interchangeable lens having an electric zoom function includes a zoom driving unit that drives a zoom lens that is an optical member for zooming.
  • the accessory is provided with a drive unit, the drive unit is driven using a lens driving power source, as in the case of the interchangeable lens.
  • the type of lens driving power supplied from the camera to the interchangeable lens is appropriately set according to the interchangeable lens constituting the camera system.
  • one of the interchangeable lenses constituting the camera system includes four optical member driving units (for example, a focus driving unit, a camera shake correction mechanism driving unit, an aperture driving unit, and a zoom driving unit), each having a different operating voltage.
  • four types of lens driving power are supplied from the camera.
  • four terminals as power supply terminals are provided in the camera side terminal group and the lens side terminal group.
  • ground terminal In the above-described embodiment, two ground terminals are provided, but a single ground terminal may be used. Note that, by providing a plurality of ground terminals as in the camera system of the above embodiment, more stable power supply can be achieved.
  • two independent ground terminals are provided, but two ground terminals may be connected. Thereby, the area of a terminal can be expanded and more stable power supply becomes possible.
  • the polarity of a specific terminal is determined and it is detected that the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer.
  • at least one terminal for determining the polarity may be used. That is, at least one terminal on the interchangeable lens side needs to be pulled up to the potential of the system power supply via the pull-up resistor. In this case, at least one terminal excluding the power supply terminal and the ground terminal is used as a detection terminal.
  • the camera control unit that performs various processes is configured by a microcomputer (camera microcomputer).
  • the hardware configuration for performing various processes is not limited thereto.
  • Various processors can be changed in circuit configuration after manufacturing a CPU, FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array), which is a general-purpose processor that functions as a processing unit that executes various processes by executing software (programs). Includes dedicated electrical circuits that are specially designed processors to execute specific processing such as PLD (PLD: Programmable Logic Device) and ASIC (ASIC: Application Specific Integrated Circuit) It is.
  • PLD Programmable Logic Device
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • One processing unit may be composed of one of these various processors, or may be composed of two or more processors of the same type or different types. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of FPGAs or a combination of a CPU and FPGA.
  • a plurality of processing units may be configured with one processor.
  • a processor As an example of configuring a plurality of processing units with one processor, first, as represented by a computer such as a client or server, one processor is configured with a combination of one or more CPUs and software, There is a form in which this processor functions as a plurality of processing units.
  • SoC system-on-chip
  • IC integrated circuit
  • the various processing units are configured by using one or more of the various processors as a hardware structure.
  • the hardware structure of these various processors is more specifically an electric circuit in which circuit elements such as semiconductor elements are combined.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Structure And Mechanism Of Cameras (AREA)
  • Studio Devices (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a camera system, a camera, an interchangeable lens, and a method for determining camera system compatibility, with which it is possible to easily and quickly determine compatibility between a camera and an interchangeable lens. An 11th terminal (CC11) provided to a camera (10) and an 11th terminal (LC11) provided to an interchangeable lens (100) are constituted by terminals capable of open drain output. The camera-side 11th terminal (CC11) is set to a first polarity if the camera (10) corresponds to a specific function, and is set to a second polarity if the camera (10) does not correspond. The interchangeable-lens-side 11th terminal (LC11) is set to the first polarity if the interchangeable lens (100) corresponds to a specific function, and is set to the second polarity if the interchangeable lens (100) does not correspond. The mutually connected camera-side 11th terminal (CC11) and interchangeable-lens-side 11th terminal (LC11) are the first polarity only if both are set to the first polarity. Accordingly, by detecting the polarity of the camera-side 11th terminal (CC11) and the polarity of the interchangeable-lens-side 11th terminal (LC11), both the camera (10) and the interchangeable lens (100) can determine whether there is compatibility.

Description

カメラシステム、カメラ、交換レンズ、及び、カメラシステムの互換性判定方法Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and camera system compatibility determination method
 本発明は、レンズ交換式のカメラシステム、カメラ、交換レンズ、及び、その互換性判定方法に関する。 The present invention relates to an interchangeable lens camera system, a camera, an interchangeable lens, and a compatibility determination method thereof.
 レンズ交換式のカメラシステムでは、カメラと交換レンズとが、さまざまに組み合わされて使用される。この結果、新しいタイプのカメラと古いタイプの交換レンズとが組み合わされて使用されることがある。 In the interchangeable lens camera system, the camera and the interchangeable lens are used in various combinations. As a result, a new type camera and an old type interchangeable lens may be used in combination.
 新しいタイプのカメラには、新たな機能が搭載されている場合があり、この場合、古いタイプの交換レンズでは、当該機能を使用できない場合がある。同様に、古いタイプのカメラでは、新しいタイプの交換レンズに搭載されている機能を使用できない場合がある。 ∙ New types of cameras may have new functions. In this case, the old types of interchangeable lenses may not be able to use the functions. Similarly, the functions installed in the new type of interchangeable lens may not be used with the old type camera.
 このため、レンズ交換式のカメラシステムでは、起動時にカメラ及び交換レンズの双方で互換性の有無が判定される。たとえば、特許文献1に記載のカメラシステムでは、起動時にカメラと交換レンズとの間で所定の情報を送受して、互換性の有無を判定する構成としている。 For this reason, in the interchangeable lens camera system, the compatibility of both the camera and the interchangeable lens is determined at startup. For example, the camera system described in Patent Document 1 has a configuration in which predetermined information is transmitted and received between the camera and the interchangeable lens at the time of activation to determine compatibility.
特開2010-204430号公報JP 2010-204430 A
 しかしながら、特許文献1に記載のカメラシステムのように、カメラと交換レンズとの間で所定の情報を送受して、互換性を判定する構成では、カメラと交換レンズとの間で通信を確立させたり、互いに情報を送受したりする必要があり、判定に時間がかかるという欠点がある。また、この結果、起動に時間がかかるという欠点がある。 However, in a configuration in which predetermined information is transmitted and received between the camera and the interchangeable lens and compatibility is determined as in the camera system described in Patent Document 1, communication is established between the camera and the interchangeable lens. Or it is necessary to send and receive information to / from each other, and there is a drawback that it takes time for the determination. As a result, there is a drawback that it takes time to start.
 本発明は、このような事情に鑑みてなされたもので、簡単かつ迅速にカメラと交換レンズとの間の互換性を判定できるカメラシステム、カメラ、交換レンズ、及び、カメラシステムの互換性判定方法を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and a camera system, a camera, an interchangeable lens, and a compatibility determination method for a camera system that can easily and quickly determine compatibility between a camera and an interchangeable lens. The purpose is to provide.
 上記課題を解決するための手段は、次のとおりである。 Measures for solving the above problems are as follows.
 (1)カメラと、カメラに着脱自在に装着される交換レンズと、を備えたカメラシステムであって、カメラは、カメラ側通信端子と、カメラ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するカメラ側通信端子極性設定部であって、カメラが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するカメラ側通信端子極性設定部と、カメラ側通信端子の極性を検出し、検出した極性が第1極性の場合に交換レンズが特定の機能に対応していると判定するカメラ側判定部と、を備え、交換レンズは、カメラに装着された場合にカメラ側通信端子に接続されるレンズ側通信端子と、レンズ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するレンズ側通信端子極性設定部であって、交換レンズが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するレンズ側通信端子極性設定部と、レンズ側通信端子の極性を検出し、検出した極性が第1極性の場合にカメラが特定の機能に対応していると判定するレンズ側判定部と、を備え、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる、カメラシステム。 (1) A camera system including a camera and an interchangeable lens that is detachably attached to the camera, wherein the camera has a camera-side communication terminal and a camera-side communication terminal having a first polarity or a second polarity. The camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit is set to the first polarity when the camera is compatible with a specific function, and is set to the second polarity when the camera is not compatible. An interchangeable lens, comprising: a polarity setting unit; and a camera side determination unit that detects the polarity of the communication terminal on the camera side and determines that the interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function when the detected polarity is the first polarity. Is a lens side communication terminal connected to the camera side communication terminal when attached to the camera, and a lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit for setting the polarity of the lens side communication terminal to the first polarity or the second polarity. , Interchangeable lenses are specific When the function is supported, the first polarity is set. When the function is not supported, the lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit to be set to the second polarity and the polarity of the lens side communication terminal are detected. A lens-side determination unit that determines that the camera corresponds to a specific function in the case of the first polarity, and the camera-side communication terminal and the lens-side communication terminal are both connected in the first state. A camera system in which both are first polarities only when set to polarities, and both are second polarities when at least one is set to second polarities.
 本態様によれば、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性に基づいて、互換性が判定される。ここで、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる動作を行う。いわゆる論理積として機能する。このような機能は、たとえば、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子をオープンドレイン出力が可能な端子で構成することで実現できる。カメラは、自身が特定の機能に対応している場合、カメラ側通信端子の極性が第1極性に設定され、対応していない場合は、カメラ側通信端子の極性が第2極性に設定される。交換レンズも同様であり、自身が特定の機能に対応している場合は、レンズ側通信端子の極性が第1極性に設定され、対応していない場合は、レンズ側通信端子の極性が第2極性に設定される。この場合、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合にのみ、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性が第1極性となる。それ以外は第2極性となる。したがって、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性の状態を判定すれば、互換性を判定できる。すなわち、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性が、第1極性の場合は互換性あり、第2極性の場合は互換性なし、と判定できる。なお、互換性なしの場合とは、カメラと交換レンズの少なくとも一方が特定の機能に対応していない場合である。このように、本態様によれば、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性に基づいて互換性を判定できるので、簡単かつ迅速にカメラと交換レンズとの間の互換性を判定できる。 According to this aspect, compatibility is determined based on the polarities of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal. Here, the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both set to the first polarity only when both are set to the first polarity while being connected to each other, and at least one is set to the second polarity. In the case of both, the operation of the second polarity is performed. It functions as a so-called logical product. Such a function can be realized, for example, by configuring the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal with terminals capable of open drain output. When the camera is compatible with a specific function, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when the camera is not compatible, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the second polarity. . The same applies to the interchangeable lens. When the lens itself is compatible with a specific function, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when the lens is not compatible, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is the second polarity. Set to polarity. In this case, only when both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal becomes the first polarity. Otherwise, it is the second polarity. Therefore, compatibility can be determined by determining the polarity states of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal. That is, it can be determined that the camera-side communication terminal and the lens-side communication terminal are compatible when the polarity is the first polarity and not compatible when the polarity is the second polarity. The case of no compatibility is a case where at least one of the camera and the interchangeable lens does not support a specific function. Thus, according to this aspect, since compatibility can be determined based on the polarities of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal, compatibility between the camera and the interchangeable lens can be determined easily and quickly.
 (2)カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子は、それぞれカメラ及び交換レンズがシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つであり、カメラは、カメラ側判定部による判定後に、交換レンズとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うカメラ側通信設定部を更に備え、交換レンズは、レンズ側判定部による判定後に、カメラとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うレンズ側通信設定部を更に備える、上記(1)のカメラシステム。 (2) The camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are each one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication. The camera is exchanged after the determination by the camera side determination unit. The camera-side communication setting unit further performs communication setting of a plurality of terminals used for serial communication with the lens, and the interchangeable lens has a plurality of terminals used for serial communication with the camera after determination by the lens-side determination unit. The camera system according to (1), further including a lens side communication setting unit configured to perform the communication setting.
 本態様によれば、カメラ及び交換レンズがシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つをカメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子として使用して、互換性が判定される。これにより、別途、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子を備える必要がなくなり、構成を簡素化できる。カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子として使用した端子は、互換性の判定後、本来の用途である通信に使用される。 According to this aspect, compatibility is determined using one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication as the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately provide a camera side communication terminal and a lens side communication terminal, and the configuration can be simplified. The terminals used as the camera-side communication terminal and the lens-side communication terminal are used for communication, which is the original application, after determining compatibility.
 (3)カメラ及び交換レンズの間に着脱自在に装着されるアクセサリーを更に含み、特定の機能は、アクセサリーが装着された場合に、装着されたアクセサリーと通信する機能である、上記(1)又は(2)のカメラシステム。 (3) The above-described (1) or (1) further includes an accessory that is detachably mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens, and the specific function is a function of communicating with the mounted accessory when the accessory is mounted. (2) Camera system.
 本態様によれば、カメラシステムにアクセサリーが含まれる。カメラ及び交換レンズは、特定の機能への対応の有無として、装着されたアクセサリーと通信する機能の有無が判定される。これにより、アクセサリーが装着された場合に、カメラ及び交換レンズがアクセサリーと通信できるか否かを簡単かつ迅速に判定できる。 According to this aspect, the camera system includes an accessory. As for the camera and the interchangeable lens, the presence / absence of a function to communicate with the attached accessory is determined as the presence / absence of a specific function. Thereby, when an accessory is mounted | worn, it can be determined easily and rapidly whether a camera and an interchangeable lens can communicate with an accessory.
 (4)カメラは、カメラ側拡張通信端子を更に備え、交換レンズは、カメラに装着された場合にカメラ側拡張通信端子に接続されるレンズ側拡張通信端子を更に備え、アクセサリーは、カメラに装着された場合にカメラ側拡張通信端子に接続されるアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子と、交換レンズが装着された場合にレンズ側拡張通信端子に接続されるアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子と、を備え、交換レンズがカメラに直接装着された場合、カメラ及び交換レンズは、カメラ側拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子を介して通信し、アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合、カメラ及びアクセサリーは、カメラ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介して通信し、交換レンズ及びアクセサリーは、レンズ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介して通信する、上記(3)のカメラシステム。 (4) The camera further includes a camera-side extended communication terminal, the interchangeable lens further includes a lens-side extended communication terminal that is connected to the camera-side extended communication terminal when attached to the camera, and the accessory is attached to the camera. An accessory-side first extended communication terminal connected to the camera-side extended communication terminal when connected, and an accessory-side second extended communication terminal connected to the lens-side extended communication terminal when the interchangeable lens is attached. When the interchangeable lens is directly attached to the camera, the camera and the interchangeable lens communicate via the camera side extended communication terminal and the lens side extended communication terminal, and the accessory is attached. When both correspond to a specific function, the camera and the accessory are connected via the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first extended communication terminal. Communicate, exchange lenses and accessories communicate via the lens-side extended communication terminals and accessories side second extended communication terminal, a camera system of the above (3).
 本態様によれば、カメラにカメラ側拡張通信端子が備えられ、交換レンズにレンズ側拡張通信端子が備えられる。カメラ側拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子は、交換レンズをカメラに装着すると、相互に接続される。交換レンズがカメラに直接装着された場合、カメラ及び交換レンズは、カメラ側拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子を介して通信する。また、アクセサリーには、カメラに装着された場合にカメラ側拡張通信端子に接続されるアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子、及び、交換レンズが装着された場合にレンズ側拡張通信端子に接続されるアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子が備えられる。アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合、すなわち、双方がアクセサリーと通信する機能に対応している場合、カメラ及びアクセサリーは、カメラ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介して通信する。また、交換レンズ及びアクセサリーは、レンズ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介して通信する。 According to this aspect, the camera is provided with the camera side extended communication terminal, and the interchangeable lens is provided with the lens side extended communication terminal. The camera side extended communication terminal and the lens side extended communication terminal are connected to each other when the interchangeable lens is attached to the camera. When the interchangeable lens is directly attached to the camera, the camera and the interchangeable lens communicate via the camera side extended communication terminal and the lens side extended communication terminal. The accessories include an accessory-side first extended communication terminal connected to the camera-side extended communication terminal when attached to the camera, and an accessory connected to the lens-side extended communication terminal when the interchangeable lens is attached. Side second extended communication terminal is provided. When the accessory is attached and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, that is, when both support the function of communicating with the accessory, the camera and the accessory are on the camera side. Communication is performed via the extended communication terminal and the accessory-side first extended communication terminal. The interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal.
 (5)アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合、カメラは、カメラ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介してアクセサリーと通信し、アクセサリーからアクセサリーの情報を取得する、上記(4)のカメラシステム。 (5) When an accessory is attached and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, the camera is connected via the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first extended communication terminal. (4) The camera system which communicates with and acquires the information of an accessory from an accessory.
 本態様によれば、アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合、すなわち、双方がアクセサリーと通信する機能に対応している場合、カメラは、カメラ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介してアクセサリーと通信し、アクセサリーからアクセサリーの情報を取得する。これにより、カメラ側において、アクセサリーの情報を取得できる。 According to this aspect, when an accessory is mounted and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, that is, when both support the function of communicating with the accessory, the camera Communicates with the accessory via the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first extended communication terminal, and acquires information on the accessory from the accessory. Thereby, the accessory information can be acquired on the camera side.
 (6)アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合、交換レンズは、レンズ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介してアクセサリーと通信し、交換レンズの情報をアクセサリーに送信し、アクセサリーは、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子及びカメラ側拡張通信端子を介してカメラと通信し、交換レンズから受信した交換レンズの情報にアクセサリーの情報を付加してカメラに送信する、上記(5)のカメラシステム。 (6) When an accessory is attached and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, the interchangeable lens is connected via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal. Communicate with the accessory, send information about the interchangeable lens to the accessory, the accessory communicates with the camera via the accessory-side first extended communication terminal and the camera-side extended communication terminal, and the information on the interchangeable lens received from the interchangeable lens The camera system according to (5), wherein the information is added and transmitted to the camera.
 本態様によれば、アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合、すなわち、双方がアクセサリーと通信する機能に対応している場合、交換レンズは、レンズ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介してアクセサリーと通信し、交換レンズの情報をアクセサリーに送信する。また、アクセサリーは、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子及びカメラ側拡張通信端子を介してカメラと通信し、交換レンズから受信した交換レンズの情報にアクセサリーの情報を付加してカメラに送信する。これにより、カメラ側において、一度に交換レンズ及びアクセサリーの情報を取得できる。 According to this aspect, when an accessory is attached and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, that is, when both support the function of communicating with the accessory, the replacement The lens communicates with the accessory via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and transmits information on the interchangeable lens to the accessory. The accessory communicates with the camera via the accessory-side first extended communication terminal and the camera-side extended communication terminal, adds the accessory information to the information on the interchangeable lens received from the interchangeable lens, and transmits the information to the camera. Thereby, the information of an interchangeable lens and accessories can be acquired at once on the camera side.
 (7)カメラは、アクセサリーの情報を取得した後、カメラ側拡張通信端子、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子、アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子を介して交換レンズと通信し、交換レンズの状態の情報を交換レンズから取得する、上記(5)又は(6)のカメラシステム。 (7) After acquiring information about the accessory, the camera communicates with the interchangeable lens through the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal, The camera system according to (5) or (6), wherein information on the state of the interchangeable lens is acquired from the interchangeable lens.
 本態様によれば、アクセサリーの情報を取得した後、カメラは、カメラ側拡張通信端子、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子、アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子を介して交換レンズと通信し、交換レンズの状態の情報を交換レンズから取得する。これにより、アクセサリーの情報の取得後も拡張通信端子を有効活用できる。 According to this aspect, after acquiring the accessory information, the camera is connected to the interchangeable lens via the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal. Communicate and obtain information on the status of the interchangeable lens from the interchangeable lens. Thereby, the extended communication terminal can be effectively used even after acquiring the accessory information.
 (8)交換レンズは、レンズ側拡張通信端子の極性を第1極性に設定するレンズ側拡張通信端子極性設定部を更に備え、アクセサリーは、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子の極性を第2極性に設定するアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子極性設定部を更に備え、カメラは、カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性を検出して、アクセサリーの装着を検出するアクセサリー検出部を更に備え、アクセサリー検出部は、カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合、アクセサリーが装着されていると判定し、カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性が第2極性の場合、アクセサリーが装着されていないと判定して、アクセサリーの装着を検出する、上記(4)から(7)のいずれか一のカメラシステム。 (8) The interchangeable lens further includes a lens side extended communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the lens side extended communication terminal to the first polarity, and the accessory sets the polarity of the accessory side first extended communication terminal to the second polarity. The accessory-side first extended communication terminal polarity setting unit to be set is further included. The camera further includes an accessory detection unit that detects the polarity of the camera-side extended communication terminal and detects attachment of the accessory. If the polarity of the side extended communication terminal is the first polarity, it is determined that the accessory is attached. If the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal is the second polarity, it is determined that the accessory is not attached. The camera system according to any one of (4) to (7), wherein the mounting is detected.
 本態様によれば、レンズ側拡張通信端子の極性を第1極性に設定するレンズ側拡張通信端子極性設定部と、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子の極性を第2極性に設定するアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子極性設定部と、が更に備えられる。カメラは、カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性を検出して、アクセサリーの装着を検出する。具体的には、カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合、アクセサリーが装着されていると判定し、カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性が第2極性の場合、アクセサリーが装着されていないと判定して、アクセサリーの装着を検出する。これにより、簡単かつ迅速にアクセサリーの装着の有無を検出できる。 According to this aspect, the lens side extended communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the lens side extended communication terminal to the first polarity, and the accessory side first that sets the polarity of the accessory side first extended communication terminal to the second polarity. And an extended communication terminal polarity setting unit. The camera detects the attachment of the accessory by detecting the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal. Specifically, when the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal is the first polarity, it is determined that the accessory is attached. When the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal is the second polarity, the accessory is not attached. Judgment and detection of attachment of accessories. Thereby, the presence or absence of attachment of an accessory can be detected easily and quickly.
 (9)交換レンズが着脱自在に装着されるカメラであって、交換レンズが装着された場合に交換レンズに備えられたレンズ側通信端子に接続されるカメラ側通信端子と、カメラ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するカメラ側通信端子極性設定部であって、カメラが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するカメラ側通信端子極性設定部と、カメラ側通信端子の極性を検出し、検出した極性が第1極性の場合に交換レンズが特定の機能に対応していると判定するカメラ側判定部と、を備え、交換レンズは、特定の機能に対応している場合、レンズ側通信端子の極性が第1極性に設定され、対応していない場合、レンズ側通信端子の極性が第2極性に設定され、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる、カメラ。 (9) A camera in which an interchangeable lens is detachably mounted, and when the interchangeable lens is mounted, a camera-side communication terminal connected to a lens-side communication terminal provided in the interchangeable lens, and a camera-side communication terminal A camera-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity to the first polarity or the second polarity, and is set to the first polarity when the camera supports a specific function, and the first when the camera does not support the specific function. The camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets two polarities, and the camera side that detects the polarity of the camera side communication terminal and determines that the interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function when the detected polarity is the first polarity When the interchangeable lens is compatible with a specific function, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when the interchangeable lens is not compatible, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is the second polarity. The polarity is set and the camera Both the terminal and the lens side communication terminal are set to the first polarity when both are connected to each other, and both are set to the first polarity, and both are set to the second polarity when at least one is set to the second polarity. Camera with second polarity.
 本態様によれば、カメラ側通信端子の極性に基づいて互換性を判定できるので、簡単かつ迅速に交換レンズとの間の互換性を判定できる。 According to this aspect, since compatibility can be determined based on the polarity of the camera side communication terminal, compatibility with the interchangeable lens can be determined easily and quickly.
 (10)カメラ側通信端子は、カメラが交換レンズとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つであり、カメラ側判定部による判定後に、交換レンズとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うカメラ側通信設定部を更に備える、上記(9)のカメラ。 (10) The camera side communication terminal is one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera performs serial communication with the interchangeable lens, and is used when serially communicating with the interchangeable lens after determination by the camera side determination unit. The camera according to (9), further including a camera side communication setting unit configured to perform communication settings of a plurality of terminals.
 本態様によれば、カメラが交換レンズとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つをカメラ側通信端子として使用して、互換性が判定される。これにより、別途、カメラ側通信端子を備える必要がなくなり、構成を簡素化できる。カメラ側通信端子として使用した端子は、互換性の判定後、本来の用途である通信に使用される。 According to this aspect, compatibility is determined using one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera performs serial communication with the interchangeable lens as the camera-side communication terminal. This eliminates the need for a separate camera-side communication terminal and simplifies the configuration. The terminal used as the camera side communication terminal is used for communication which is the original purpose after the compatibility determination.
 (11)カメラに着脱自在に装着される交換レンズであって、カメラに装着された場合にカメラに備えられたカメラ側通信端子に接続されるレンズ側通信端子と、レンズ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するレンズ側通信端子極性設定部であって、交換レンズが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するレンズ側通信端子極性設定部と、レンズ側通信端子の極性を検出し、検出した極性が第1極性の場合にカメラが特定の機能に対応していると判定するレンズ側判定部と、を備え、カメラは、特定の機能に対応している場合、カメラ側通信端子の極性が第1極性に設定され、対応していない場合、カメラ側通信端子の極性が第2極性に設定され、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる、交換レンズ。 (11) An interchangeable lens that is detachably attached to the camera, and when attached to the camera, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal connected to the camera side communication terminal provided in the camera and the polarity of the lens side communication terminal A lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the first polarity or the second polarity. When the interchangeable lens supports a specific function, the interchangeable lens is set to the first polarity. A lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity, and a lens-side determination unit that detects the polarity of the lens-side communication terminal and determines that the camera corresponds to a specific function when the detected polarity is the first polarity When the camera is compatible with a specific function, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when the camera is not compatible, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the second polarity. Camera side communication terminal and Only when both terminals are set to the first polarity when connected to each other, both terminals are set to the first polarity, and when at least one is set to the second polarity, both are set to the second polarity. Polarized interchangeable lens.
 本態様によれば、レンズ側通信端子の極性に基づいて互換性を判定できるので、簡単かつ迅速にカメラとの間の互換性を判定できる。 According to this aspect, since compatibility can be determined based on the polarity of the lens side communication terminal, compatibility with the camera can be determined easily and quickly.
 (12)レンズ側通信端子は、交換レンズがカメラとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つであり、レンズ側判定部による判定後に、カメラとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うレンズ側通信設定部を更に備える、上記(11)の交換レンズ。 (12) The lens side communication terminal is one of a plurality of terminals used when the interchangeable lens performs serial communication with the camera, and a plurality of terminals used when performing serial communication with the camera after determination by the lens side determination unit. The interchangeable lens according to (11), further including a lens side communication setting unit configured to perform communication setting of the terminal.
 本態様によれば、交換レンズがカメラとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つをレンズ側通信端子として使用して、互換性が判定される。これにより、別途、レンズ側通信端子を備える必要がなくなり、構成を簡素化できる。レンズ側通信端子として使用した端子は、互換性の判定後、本来の用途である通信に使用される。 According to this aspect, compatibility is determined using one of a plurality of terminals used when the interchangeable lens performs serial communication with the camera as the lens-side communication terminal. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide a lens side communication terminal, and the configuration can be simplified. The terminal used as the lens side communication terminal is used for communication which is the original purpose after the compatibility is determined.
 (13)カメラと、カメラに着脱自在に装着される交換レンズと、を備えたカメラシステムの互換性判定方法であって、交換レンズをカメラに装着するステップと、カメラに備えられたカメラ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するステップであって、カメラが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するステップと、交換レンズに備えられたレンズ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するステップであって、交換レンズが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するステップと、カメラ側通信端子の極性に基づいて、カメラに装着された交換レンズが特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定するステップであって、カメラ側通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合に交換レンズが特定の機能に対応していると判定するステップと、レンズ側通信端子の極性に基づいて、交換レンズが装着されたカメラが特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定するステップであって、レンズ側通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合にカメラが特定の機能に対応していると判定するステップと、を備え、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる、カメラシステムの互換性判定方法。 (13) A compatibility determination method for a camera system including a camera and an interchangeable lens that is detachably attached to the camera, the step of attaching the interchangeable lens to the camera, and camera-side communication provided in the camera A step of setting the polarity of the terminal to the first polarity or the second polarity, where the camera is set to the first polarity when it corresponds to a specific function, and is set to the second polarity when it does not correspond And a step of setting the polarity of the lens side communication terminal provided in the interchangeable lens to the first polarity or the second polarity, and when the interchangeable lens supports a specific function, the polarity is set to the first polarity. Setting and setting to the second polarity if not compatible, and determining whether or not the interchangeable lens attached to the camera supports a specific function based on the polarity of the camera side communication terminal A step of determining that the interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function when the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is the first polarity, and a camera on which the interchangeable lens is mounted based on the polarity of the lens side communication terminal Determining whether the camera corresponds to a specific function when the lens side communication terminal has a first polarity. When the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both connected to each other and set to the first polarity, both are set to the first polarity, and at least one is set to the second polarity. Is a camera system compatibility determination method in which both are of the second polarity.
 本態様によれば、カメラが、特定の機能に対応している場合、カメラ側通信端子の極性が、第1極性に設定され、対応していない場合、第2極性に設定される。また、交換レンズが、特定の機能に対応している場合、レンズ側通信端子の極性が、第1極性に設定され、対応していない場合、第2極性に設定される。ここで、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる。したがって、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性の状態を判定すれば、互換性を判定できる。具体的には、カメラ側においては、カメラ側通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合にのみ、交換レンズが特定の機能に対応していると判定する。また、交換レンズ側においては、レンズ側通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合にのみ、カメラが特定の機能に対応していると判定する。このように、本態様によれば、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性に基づいて互換性を判定できるので、簡単かつ迅速にカメラと交換レンズとの間の互換性を判定できる。 According to this aspect, when the camera supports a specific function, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when it does not support, the second polarity is set. Further, when the interchangeable lens supports a specific function, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when it does not support, the second polarity is set. Here, the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both set to the first polarity only when both are set to the first polarity while being connected to each other, and at least one is set to the second polarity. In both cases, both have the second polarity. Therefore, compatibility can be determined by determining the polarity states of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal. Specifically, on the camera side, it is determined that the interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function only when the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is the first polarity. On the interchangeable lens side, it is determined that the camera supports a specific function only when the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is the first polarity. Thus, according to this aspect, since compatibility can be determined based on the polarities of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal, compatibility between the camera and the interchangeable lens can be determined easily and quickly.
 (14)カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子は、カメラ及び交換レンズがシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つであり、カメラに装着された交換レンズが特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定するステップ、及び、交換レンズが装着されたカメラが特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定するステップの後にカメラ及び交換レンズがシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うステップを更に含む、上記(13)のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。 (14) The camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication, and the interchangeable lens attached to the camera corresponds to a specific function. A plurality of units used for serial communication between the camera and the interchangeable lens after the step of determining whether or not the camera to which the interchangeable lens is attached corresponds to the specific function. (13) The camera system compatibility determination method according to (13), further including a step of setting communication of a terminal.
 本態様によれば、カメラ及び交換レンズがシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つをカメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子として使用して、互換性が判定される。これにより、別途、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子を備える必要がなくなり、構成を簡素化できる。カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子として使用した端子は、互換性の判定後、本来の用途である通信に使用される。 According to this aspect, compatibility is determined using one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication as the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately provide a camera side communication terminal and a lens side communication terminal, and the configuration can be simplified. The terminals used as the camera-side communication terminal and the lens-side communication terminal are used for communication, which is the original application, after determining compatibility.
 (15)カメラシステムは、カメラ及び交換レンズの間に着脱自在に装着されるアクセサリーを更に含み、特定の機能は、カメラと交換レンズとの間にアクセサリーが装着された場合に、装着されたアクセサリーとの間で通信する機能である、上記(13)又は(14)のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。 (15) The camera system further includes an accessory that is detachably mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens, and the specific function is the accessory that is mounted when the accessory is mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens. The camera system compatibility determination method according to (13) or (14), which is a function of communicating with a camera.
 本態様によれば、カメラシステムにアクセサリーが含まれる。カメラ及び交換レンズは、特定の機能への対応の有無として、装着されたアクセサリーと通信する機能の有無が判定される。これにより、アクセサリーが装着された場合に、カメラ及び交換レンズがアクセサリーと通信できるか否かを簡単かつ迅速に判定できる。 According to this aspect, the camera system includes an accessory. As for the camera and the interchangeable lens, the presence / absence of a function to communicate with the attached accessory is determined as the presence / absence of a specific function. Thereby, when an accessory is mounted | worn, it can be determined easily and rapidly whether a camera and an interchangeable lens can communicate with an accessory.
 (16)アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合、カメラに備えられたカメラ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリーに備えられたアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介して、カメラ及びアクセサリーが通信するステップと、交換レンズに備えられたレンズ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリーに備えられたアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介して、交換レンズ及びアクセサリーが通信するステップと、を更に含む、上記(15)のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。 (16) When an accessory is attached and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, the camera side extended communication terminal provided in the camera and the accessory side first provided in the accessory The camera and the accessory communicate via the extended communication terminal, and the interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate via the lens side extended communication terminal provided on the interchangeable lens and the accessory side second extended communication terminal provided on the accessory. A compatibility determination method for a camera system according to the above (15).
 本態様によれば、アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応している場合、すなわち、双方がアクセサリーと通信する機能に対応している場合、カメラ及びアクセサリーは、カメラ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介して通信する。また、交換レンズ及びアクセサリーは、レンズ側拡張通信端子及びアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介して通信する。 According to this aspect, when an accessory is mounted and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support a specific function, that is, when both support the function of communicating with the accessory, the camera And the accessory communicate via the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first extended communication terminal. The interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal.
 (17)交換レンズ及びアクセサリーが通信するステップでは、交換レンズの情報をアクセサリーに送信し、カメラ及びアクセサリーが通信するステップでは、交換レンズから受信した交換レンズの情報にアクセサリーの情報を付加してカメラに送信する、上記(16)のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。 (17) In the step where the interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate, the interchangeable lens information is transmitted to the accessory, and in the step where the camera and the accessory communicate, the accessory information is added to the interchangeable lens information received from the interchangeable lens. (16) The compatibility determination method of the camera system according to (16).
 本態様によれば、交換レンズ及びアクセサリーが通信するステップにおいて、交換レンズの情報がアクセサリーに送信される。アクセサリーは、交換レンズから受信した交換レンズの情報に自身の情報を付加してカメラに送信する。これにより、カメラ側において、一度に交換レンズ及びアクセサリーの情報を取得できる。 According to this aspect, in the step where the interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate, information about the interchangeable lens is transmitted to the accessory. The accessory adds its own information to the information on the interchangeable lens received from the interchangeable lens and transmits the information to the camera. Thereby, the information of an interchangeable lens and accessories can be acquired at once on the camera side.
 (18)アクセサリーの情報及び交換レンズの情報を取得した後、カメラ側拡張通信端子、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子、アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子を介して、カメラ及び交換レンズが通信し、カメラが交換レンズの状態の情報を取得するステップを更に含む、上記(17)のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。 (18) After acquiring the information on the accessory and the information on the interchangeable lens, the camera and the exchange are performed via the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal. The compatibility determination method for a camera system according to (17), further including a step in which the lens communicates and the camera acquires information on the state of the interchangeable lens.
 本態様によれば、アクセサリーの情報及び交換レンズの情報を取得した後、カメラは、カメラ側拡張通信端子、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子、アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子を介して交換レンズと通信し、交換レンズの状態の情報を交換レンズから取得する。これにより、アクセサリー及び交換レンズの情報の取得後も拡張通信端子を有効活用できる。 According to this aspect, after acquiring the information on the accessory and the information on the interchangeable lens, the camera includes the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal. The information on the status of the interchangeable lens is acquired from the interchangeable lens. Thereby, the extended communication terminal can be effectively used even after acquiring information about the accessory and the interchangeable lens.
 本発明によれば、簡単かつ迅速にカメラと交換レンズとの間の互換性を判定できる。 According to the present invention, the compatibility between the camera and the interchangeable lens can be determined easily and quickly.
レンズ交換式のカメラシステムの一例を示すシステム構成図System configuration diagram showing an example of an interchangeable lens camera system カメラ側マウントの正面図Front view of camera side mount レンズ側マウントの正面図Front view of lens side mount カメラの電気的な主要構成を示すブロック図Block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the camera 電源部の電気的構成を示すブロック図Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the power supply カメラマイコンが実現する機能の一例を示すブロック図Block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the camera microcomputer 交換レンズの電気的な主要構成を示すブロック図Block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the interchangeable lens レンズマイコンが実現する機能の一例を示すブロック図Block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the lens microcomputer カメラと交換レンズとの電気的な接続を示す図Diagram showing electrical connection between camera and interchangeable lens カメラ及び交換レンズに備えられた互換性判定に係わる機能のブロック図Block diagram of functions related to compatibility determination provided for cameras and interchangeable lenses 特定の機能への対応状況に応じたカメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の出力設定と検出される極性との関係を示す表A table showing the relationship between the output setting of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal and the detected polarity according to the support status for a specific function レンズ交換式のカメラシステムの第2の実施の形態のシステム構成図System configuration diagram of second embodiment of interchangeable lens camera system アクセサリーの電気的な構成を示す図The figure which shows the electrical constitution of the accessory アクセサリーマイコンが実現する機能の一例を示すブロック図Block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the accessory microcomputer カメラと交換レンズとの間にアクセサリーを装着した場合の相互の電気的な接続を示す図The figure which shows the mutual electrical connection at the time of mounting accessories between a camera and an interchangeable lens
 以下、添付図面に従って本発明を実施するための好ましい形態について詳説する。 Hereinafter, preferred embodiments for carrying out the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
 ◆◆第1の実施の形態◆◆
 [カメラシステムの構成]
 レンズ交換式のカメラシステムは、少なくとも一つのカメラと、少なくとも一つの交換レンズと、を備えて構成される。
◆◆ First embodiment ◆◆
[Camera system configuration]
The interchangeable lens camera system includes at least one camera and at least one interchangeable lens.
 図1は、レンズ交換式のカメラシステムの一例を示すシステム構成図である。 FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing an example of an interchangeable lens camera system.
 同図に示すカメラシステム1は、複数のカメラ10と、複数の交換レンズ100と、を備えて構成される。 The camera system 1 shown in the figure includes a plurality of cameras 10 and a plurality of interchangeable lenses 100.
 複数のカメラ10は、それぞれデジタルカメラで構成される。各カメラ10は、仕様又は機能が異なる。たとえば、イメージセンサーの有効画素数、設定可能な撮影感度、設定可能な測光方式、設定可能な露出制御方式、シャッター形式、設定可能なシャッター速度、連写枚数、設定可能なフォーカスモード、設定可能なホワイトバランス等が異なる。各カメラ10は、それぞれ共通のカメラ側マウント14を備える。したがって、各カメラ10で同じ交換レンズ100を装着できる。 The plurality of cameras 10 are each composed of a digital camera. Each camera 10 has different specifications or functions. For example, the effective number of pixels of the image sensor, settable shooting sensitivity, settable metering method, settable exposure control method, shutter type, settable shutter speed, number of continuous shots, settable focus mode, settable White balance is different. Each camera 10 includes a common camera-side mount 14. Therefore, the same interchangeable lens 100 can be attached to each camera 10.
 複数の交換レンズ100は、それぞれ仕様の異なるレンズで構成される。たとえば、焦点距離、手ブレ補正機能の有無等が異なる。各交換レンズ100は、それぞれ共通のレンズ側マウント104を備える。レンズ側マウント104は、カメラ側マウント14に対応した構造を有する。したがって、各交換レンズ100は、いずれのカメラ10にも装着できる。 The plurality of interchangeable lenses 100 are composed of lenses having different specifications. For example, the focal length, the presence or absence of a camera shake correction function, and the like are different. Each interchangeable lens 100 includes a common lens side mount 104. The lens side mount 104 has a structure corresponding to the camera side mount 14. Therefore, each interchangeable lens 100 can be attached to any camera 10.
 《カメラ側マウント》
 図2は、カメラ側マウントの正面図である。
<Camera side mount>
FIG. 2 is a front view of the camera side mount.
 各カメラ10は、そのカメラボディー12の正面部分にカメラ側マウント14を備える。カメラ側マウント14は、交換レンズ100の装着部である。カメラ側マウント14は、公知のバヨネット式のマウントで構成される。なお、図2において、矢印Rで示す方向(時計回りの方向)が、カメラ10に交換レンズ100を装着する場合の交換レンズ100の回転方向である。 Each camera 10 includes a camera-side mount 14 in the front portion of its camera body 12. The camera side mount 14 is a mounting portion for the interchangeable lens 100. The camera side mount 14 is configured by a known bayonet type mount. In FIG. 2, the direction indicated by the arrow R (clockwise direction) is the rotation direction of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10.
 カメラ側マウント14には、複数の端子CC1~CC12で構成されるカメラ側端子群CCGが備えられる。カメラ側端子群CCGを構成する複数の端子CC1~CC12は、撮影光軸を中心とする一つの円の円周上に一定の間隔をもって配置される。各端子CC1~CC12が有する機能については後述する。 The camera side mount 14 is provided with a camera side terminal group CCG composed of a plurality of terminals CC1 to CC12. The plurality of terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG are arranged at a constant interval on the circumference of one circle centered on the photographing optical axis. The functions of the terminals CC1 to CC12 will be described later.
 《レンズ側マウント》
 図3は、レンズ側マウントの正面図である。
<Lens side mount>
FIG. 3 is a front view of the lens side mount.
 交換レンズ100は、そのレンズ鏡胴102の基端部にレンズ側マウント104を備える。レンズ側マウント104は、カメラ10に備えられたカメラ側マウント14に対応したバヨネット式のマウントで構成される。なお、図3において、矢印Rで示す方向(反時計回りの方向)が、カメラ10に交換レンズ100を装着する場合の交換レンズ100の回転方向(カメラ側マウント14にレンズ側マウント104を装着する場合のレンズ側マウント104の回転方向と同義)である。 The interchangeable lens 100 includes a lens side mount 104 at the base end portion of the lens barrel 102. The lens side mount 104 is constituted by a bayonet type mount corresponding to the camera side mount 14 provided in the camera 10. In FIG. 3, the direction indicated by the arrow R (counterclockwise direction) is the rotation direction of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is mounted on the camera 10 (the lens-side mount 104 is mounted on the camera-side mount 14). The same as the rotation direction of the lens side mount 104 in this case.
 レンズ側マウント104には、複数の端子LC1~LC12で構成されるレンズ側端子群LCGが備えられる。レンズ側端子群LCGは、カメラ側端子群CCGに対応して設けられる。したがって、カメラ側端子群CCGを構成する端子と同じ数の端子で構成され、かつ、各端子LC1~LC12は、カメラ側端子群CCGを構成する端子CC1~CC12と同じ間隔で配置される。 The lens side mount 104 is provided with a lens side terminal group LCG composed of a plurality of terminals LC1 to LC12. The lens side terminal group LCG is provided corresponding to the camera side terminal group CCG. Accordingly, it is configured with the same number of terminals as the terminals constituting the camera side terminal group CCG, and the terminals LC1 to LC12 are arranged at the same intervals as the terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG.
 交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、レンズ側端子群LCGの各端子LC1~LC12が、カメラ側端子群CCGの対応する端子CC1~CC12に接続される。すなわち、レンズ側端子群LCGの第1の端子LC1がカメラ側端子群CCGの第1の端子CC1に接続され、レンズ側端子群LCGの第2の端子LC2がカメラ側端子群CCGの第2の端子CC2に接続され、…、レンズ側端子群LCGの第12の端子LC12がカメラ側端子群CCGの第12の端子CC12に接続される。 When the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the terminals LC1 to LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG are connected to the corresponding terminals CC1 to CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG. That is, the first terminal LC1 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the first terminal CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG, and the second terminal LC2 of the lens side terminal group LCG is the second terminal CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG. The twelfth terminal LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
 レンズ側端子群LCGを構成する各端子LC1~LC12の機能については後述する。 The functions of the terminals LC1 to LC12 constituting the lens side terminal group LCG will be described later.
 《カメラの電気的構成》
 ここでは、各カメラ10が、共通して備える電気的な主要構成について説明する。
<Electrical configuration of camera>
Here, an electrical main configuration provided in common for each camera 10 will be described.
 図4は、カメラの電気的な主要構成を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the camera.
 同図に示すように、カメラ10は、イメージセンサー16、シャッター18、イメージセンサー駆動部20、シャッター駆動部22、アナログ信号処理部24、表示部26、画像データ記憶部28、カメラ操作部30、電源部32、及び、カメラマイコン34を備える。 As shown in the figure, the camera 10 includes an image sensor 16, a shutter 18, an image sensor drive unit 20, a shutter drive unit 22, an analog signal processing unit 24, a display unit 26, an image data storage unit 28, a camera operation unit 30, A power supply unit 32 and a camera microcomputer 34 are provided.
 〈イメージセンサー〉
 イメージセンサー16は、交換レンズを介して結像した被写体の光学像を電気信号に変換して出力する。イメージセンサー16には、CCDイメージセンサー(CCD:Charged Coupled Device/電荷結合素子)、CMOSイメージセンサー(CMOS:Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor/相補型金属酸化膜半導体)等の公知のイメージセンサーが使用される。
<Image sensor>
The image sensor 16 converts an optical image of a subject formed through the interchangeable lens into an electrical signal and outputs the electrical signal. A known image sensor such as a CCD image sensor (CCD: Charged Coupled Device) or a CMOS image sensor (CMOS: Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) is used for the image sensor 16.
 〈イメージセンサー駆動部〉
 イメージセンサー駆動部20は、イメージセンサー16の駆動回路で構成される。イメージセンサー駆動部20は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に応じて、イメージセンサー16を駆動する。
<Image sensor driver>
The image sensor drive unit 20 includes a drive circuit for the image sensor 16. The image sensor driving unit 20 drives the image sensor 16 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
 〈シャッター〉
 シャッター18は、イメージセンサー16への露光時間を調整する光路開閉装置である。シャッター18は、たとえば、スクエア型のフォーカルプレーンシャッターで構成され、イメージセンサー16の直前に配置される。
<shutter>
The shutter 18 is an optical path opening / closing device that adjusts the exposure time for the image sensor 16. The shutter 18 is constituted by, for example, a square-type focal plane shutter, and is disposed immediately before the image sensor 16.
 〈シャッター駆動部〉
 シャッター駆動部22は、シャッター18に備えられるチャージモーター、電磁石等を駆動する駆動回路で構成される。シャッター駆動部22は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に応じてチャージモーター、電磁石等を駆動する。
<Shutter driver>
The shutter drive unit 22 includes a drive circuit that drives a charge motor, an electromagnet, and the like provided in the shutter 18. The shutter drive unit 22 drives a charge motor, an electromagnet, and the like according to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
 〈アナログ信号処理部〉
 アナログ信号処理部24は、イメージセンサー16から出力されたアナログの画像信号を取り込み、所定の信号処理(たとえば、相関二重サンプリング処理、増幅処理等)を施した後、デジタルの画像信号に変換して出力する。
<Analog signal processor>
The analog signal processing unit 24 takes in an analog image signal output from the image sensor 16, performs predetermined signal processing (for example, correlated double sampling processing, amplification processing, etc.), and then converts it into a digital image signal. Output.
 〈表示部〉
 表示部26は、モニター、及び、その駆動回路で構成される。モニターは、たとえば、LCD(LCD:Liquid Crystal Display/液晶ディスプレー)で構成され、カメラボディーの背面に備えられる。
<Display section>
The display unit 26 includes a monitor and its drive circuit. The monitor is composed of, for example, an LCD (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) and is provided on the back of the camera body.
 〈画像データ記憶部〉
 画像データ記憶部28は、撮影した画像データの記憶部である。画像データ記憶部28は、メモリーカードと、そのメモリーカードを装着するソケットとを備える。メモリーカードに対する画像データの読み出し、及び、書き込みは、カメラマイコン34によって制御される。
<Image data storage unit>
The image data storage unit 28 is a storage unit for captured image data. The image data storage unit 28 includes a memory card and a socket for mounting the memory card. Reading and writing of image data to the memory card is controlled by the camera microcomputer 34.
 〈カメラ操作部〉
 カメラ操作部30は、カメラ10の操作部であり、各種操作ボタン類と、その操作ボタン類の操作を検出して、カメラマイコン34に操作信号を出力する回路と、で構成される。カメラ10に備えられる操作ボタン類には、電源ボタン、レリーズボタン等が含まれる。
<Camera operation section>
The camera operation unit 30 is an operation unit of the camera 10 and includes various operation buttons and a circuit that detects an operation of the operation buttons and outputs an operation signal to the camera microcomputer 34. The operation buttons provided on the camera 10 include a power button, a release button, and the like.
 〈電源部〉
 電源部32は、カメラマイコン34による制御の下、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の動作に必要な電源を生成し、供給する。
<Power supply part>
The power supply unit 32 generates and supplies power necessary for the operation of the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 under the control of the camera microcomputer 34.
 図5は、電源部の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the power supply unit.
 同図に示すように、電源部32は、バッテリー40、電源供給部42、及び、レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44を備える。 As shown in the figure, the power supply unit 32 includes a battery 40, a power supply unit 42, and a lens driving power switch unit 44.
 バッテリー40は、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の電源である。バッテリー40は、カメラボディーに備えられた図示しないバッテリー室に着脱自在に装填される。 The battery 40 is a power source for the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. The battery 40 is detachably loaded in a battery chamber (not shown) provided in the camera body.
 電源供給部42は、カメラマイコン34による制御の下、バッテリー40からカメラ10及び交換レンズ100の動作に必要な各種電源を生成し、各部に供給する。電源供給部42は、たとえば、DC-DCコンバーター(DC:Direct Current/直流)で構成される。 The power supply unit 42 generates various power sources necessary for the operation of the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 from the battery 40 under the control of the camera microcomputer 34 and supplies them to the respective units. The power supply unit 42 is constituted by, for example, a DC-DC converter (DC: Direct / Current).
 本実施の形態のカメラ10では、交換レンズ100に供給する電源として、それぞれ電圧の異なる複数のレンズ駆動用電源を生成する。本実施の形態のカメラ10では、電圧が+5Vの第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1と、電圧が+6.5Vの第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2と、電圧が+10Vの第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3を生成する。 In the camera 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of lens driving power sources having different voltages are generated as power sources to be supplied to the interchangeable lens 100. In the camera 10 of the present embodiment, a first lens driving power supply LV1 having a voltage of + 5V, a second lens driving power supply LV2 having a voltage of + 6.5V, and a third lens driving power supply having a voltage of + 10V. Generate LV3.
 後述するように、最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1は、カメラ側端子群CCGの第2の端子CC2に供給される。第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2は、カメラ側端子群CCGの第3の端子CC3に供給される。最も高い電圧の第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3は、カメラ側端子群CCGの第4の端子CC4に供給される。 As will be described later, the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage is supplied to the second terminal CC2 of the camera side terminal group CCG. The second lens driving power supply LV2 is supplied to the third terminal CC3 of the camera side terminal group CCG. The third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage is supplied to the fourth terminal CC4 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
 レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に応じて、電源供給部42から供給される複数のレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3の供給を個別にオンオフする。これにより、電源供給部42からカメラ側端子群CCGの複数の端子CC2、CC3、CC4に供給されるレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3の供給を個別にオンオフできる。 The lens driving power switch unit 44 individually turns on and off the supply of the plurality of lens driving power sources LV1, LV2, and LV3 supplied from the power supply unit 42 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34. Thereby, the supply of the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, LV3 supplied from the power supply unit 42 to the plurality of terminals CC2, CC3, CC4 of the camera side terminal group CCG can be individually turned on / off.
 〈カメラマイコン〉
 カメラマイコン34は、カメラ10の動作を統括制御するカメラ10の制御部である。カメラマイコン34、CPU(CPU:Central Processing Unit/中央処理装置)、ROM(ROM:Read Only Memory/読み込み専用のメモリー)、及び、RAM(RAM:Random Access Memory/データの書込みと読出しが可能なメモリー)を備え、規定のプログラムを実行することにより各種機能を提供する。ROMには、CPUが実行する各種プログラムの他、制御に必要な各種データ等が格納される。
<Camera microcomputer>
The camera microcomputer 34 is a control unit of the camera 10 that performs overall control of the operation of the camera 10. Camera microcomputer 34, CPU (CPU: Central Processing Unit), ROM (ROM: Read Only Memory), and RAM (RAM: Random Access Memory / memory capable of writing and reading data) ) And provide various functions by executing a prescribed program. In addition to various programs executed by the CPU, various data necessary for control are stored in the ROM.
 図6は、カメラマイコンが実現する機能の一例を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the camera microcomputer.
 同図に示すように、カメラマイコン34は、規定のプログラムを実行することにより、デジタル信号処理部50、表示制御部52、記録制御部54、電源制御部56、レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ制御部58、レンズ装着検出部60、カメラ通信部62等として機能する。 As shown in the figure, the camera microcomputer 34 executes a prescribed program, thereby performing a digital signal processing unit 50, a display control unit 52, a recording control unit 54, a power control unit 56, and a lens driving power switch control unit 58. , Function as a lens mounting detection unit 60, a camera communication unit 62, and the like.
 デジタル信号処理部50は、アナログ信号処理部24から出力されたデジタルの画像信号を取り込み、所定の信号処理を施して画像データを生成する。 The digital signal processing unit 50 takes in the digital image signal output from the analog signal processing unit 24 and performs predetermined signal processing to generate image data.
 表示制御部52は、表示部26に備えられたモニターに対して、所定の情報を表示させる。たとえば、再生モードに設定された場合にメモリーカードから読み出した画像をモニターに表示させる。また、撮影モードに設定された場合にイメージセンサー16で捉えた画像をリアルタイムに表示させる。更に、各種設定を行う際に設定画面をモニターに表示させる。 The display control unit 52 displays predetermined information on the monitor provided in the display unit 26. For example, when the playback mode is set, an image read from the memory card is displayed on the monitor. In addition, an image captured by the image sensor 16 when the shooting mode is set is displayed in real time. Furthermore, a setting screen is displayed on the monitor when performing various settings.
 記録制御部54は、画像データ記憶部28のソケットに装着されたメモリーカードに対して、画像データの読み書きを行う。 The recording control unit 54 reads / writes image data from / to the memory card mounted in the socket of the image data storage unit 28.
 電源制御部56は、電源供給部42を制御して、各部への電源の供給を制御する。 The power control unit 56 controls the power supply unit 42 to control the power supply to each unit.
 レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ制御部58は、レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44を制御して、レンズ駆動用電源の供給を制御する。具体的には、電源供給部42からカメラ側端子群CCGの複数の電源端子(第2の端子CC2、第3の端子CC3及び第4の端子CC4)に供給されるレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3の供給を個別にオンオフして、レンズ駆動用電源の供給を制御する。これにより、選択的にレンズ駆動用電源を供給できる。 The lens driving power switch control unit 58 controls the lens driving power switch unit 44 to control the supply of lens driving power. Specifically, the lens driving power supplies LV1 and LV2 supplied from the power supply unit 42 to a plurality of power terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) of the camera side terminal group CCG. , The supply of LV3 is individually turned on and off to control the supply of power for driving the lens. Thereby, the lens driving power can be selectively supplied.
 レンズ装着検出部60は、交換レンズ100の装着を検出する。レンズ装着検出部60は、カメラマイコン入出力ポート64に備えられたレンズ検出用ポートCP0の極性を検出して、交換レンズ100の装着の有無を判定する。 The lens mounting detection unit 60 detects the mounting of the interchangeable lens 100. The lens mounting detection unit 60 detects the polarity of the lens detection port CP0 provided in the camera microcomputer input / output port 64 and determines whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 is mounted.
 カメラ通信部62は、カメラ10に装着された交換レンズ100と通信する。通信は、カメラマイコン入出力ポート64を介して行われる。カメラマイコン入出力ポート64には、交換レンズ100と通信するための複数の通信用ポートCP1~CP7が備えられる。 The camera communication unit 62 communicates with the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10. Communication is performed via the camera microcomputer input / output port 64. The camera microcomputer input / output port 64 is provided with a plurality of communication ports CP1 to CP7 for communicating with the interchangeable lens 100.
 ここで、第1の通信用ポートCP1は、交換レンズ100からカメラ10に状態を通知するための通信用ポートである。特に、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1では、交換レンズ100の所定の機能が動作中であることを通知するポートとして第1の通信用ポートCP1が使用される。たとえば、絞り用モーターが動作中であることを通知するポートとして使用される。 Here, the first communication port CP1 is a communication port for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. In particular, in the camera system 1 of the present embodiment, the first communication port CP1 is used as a port for notifying that a predetermined function of the interchangeable lens 100 is operating. For example, it is used as a port for notifying that the aperture motor is operating.
 第2の通信用ポートCP2は、カメラ10から交換レンズ100にVSYNC信号(VSYNC:Vertical SYNChronizing/垂直同期信号)を送信するための通信用ポートである。 The second communication port CP2 is a communication port for transmitting a VSYNC signal (VSYNC: Vertical SYNChronizing / vertical synchronization signal) from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
 第3の通信用ポートCP3、第4の通信用ポートCP4及び第5の通信用ポートCP5は、交換レンズ100との間で3線による同期式のシリアル通信(以下、3線式シリアル通信という。)を行うための通信用ポートである。具体的には、同期式シリアル通信インターフェースであるSPI(SPI:Serial Peripheral Interface)を構成する通信用ポートである。 The third communication port CP3, the fourth communication port CP4, and the fifth communication port CP5 are synchronized with the interchangeable lens 100 by three lines (hereinafter referred to as three-wire serial communication). ) For communication. Specifically, it is a communication port that constitutes an SPI (SPI: Serial Peripheral Interface) that is a synchronous serial communication interface.
 第3の通信用ポートCP3は、SPIマスターとしてのカメラ10からSPIスレーブとしての交換レンズ100に信号を送信するための通信用ポート(MOSIポート(MOSI:Master Out Slave In))である。 The third communication port CP3 is a communication port (MOSI port (MOSI: Master-Out-Slave-In)) for transmitting a signal from the camera 10 as the SPI master to the interchangeable lens 100 as the SPI slave.
 また、第4の通信用ポートCP4は、SPIマスターとしてのカメラ10からSPIスレーブとしての交換レンズ100に同期用のクロック信号を送信するための通信用ポート(SCKポート(SCK:Serial ClocK))である。 The fourth communication port CP4 is a communication port (SCK port (SCK: Serial ClocK)) for transmitting a synchronization clock signal from the camera 10 as the SPI master to the interchangeable lens 100 as the SPI slave. is there.
 また、第5の通信用ポートCP5は、SPIスレーブとしての交換レンズ100からSPIマスターとしてのカメラ10に信号を送信するための通信用ポート(MISOポート(MISO:Master In Slave Out))である。なお、この第5の通信用ポートCP5は、オープンドレイン出力が可能に構成される。この点については、後述する。 Further, the fifth communication port CP5 is a communication port (MISO port (MISO: Master-In-Slave-Out)) for transmitting a signal from the interchangeable lens 100 as the SPI slave to the camera 10 as the SPI master. The fifth communication port CP5 is configured to be capable of open drain output. This point will be described later.
 第6の通信用ポートCP6も、交換レンズ100との間でシリアル通信するための通信用ポートであり、単方向のシリアル通信を行うための通信用ポートである。より具体的には、単線による調歩同期式のシリアル通信(以下、単線式シリアル通信という)を行うための通信用ポートであり、UART(Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter)を構成する通信用ポートである。特に、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1では、第6の通信用ポートCP6が、RXDポート(RXD:Received eXchange Data/データ受信)として機能し、交換レンズ100から送信された信号の受信するための通信用ポートとして使用される。 The sixth communication port CP6 is also a communication port for performing serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, and is a communication port for performing unidirectional serial communication. More specifically, it is a communication port for performing asynchronous serial communication (hereinafter referred to as single-wire serial communication) using a single line, and is a communication port that constitutes a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Receiver Transmitter). In particular, in the camera system 1 of the present embodiment, the sixth communication port CP6 functions as an RXD port (RXD: Received eXchange Data) and receives a signal transmitted from the interchangeable lens 100. Used as a communication port.
 第7の通信用ポートCP7は、交換レンズ100からカメラ10に状態を通知するための通信用ポートである。 The seventh communication port CP7 is a communication port for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100.
 カメラ通信部62は、第3の通信用ポートCP3、第4の通信用ポートCP4及び第5の通信用ポートCP5を使用して、交換レンズ100との間で3線式シリアル通信を行う際、その通信を確立するために必要な設定を行う。すなわち、カメラ通信部62は、カメラ側通信設定部としても機能する。 When the camera communication unit 62 performs three-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100 using the third communication port CP3, the fourth communication port CP4, and the fifth communication port CP5, Make the necessary settings to establish the communication. That is, the camera communication unit 62 also functions as a camera side communication setting unit.
 交換レンズ100との間の通信、及び、マウントを介した交換レンズ100との間の電気的な接続については、後に詳述する。 The communication with the interchangeable lens 100 and the electrical connection with the interchangeable lens 100 via the mount will be described in detail later.
 なお、上記は、デジタルカメラとしての基本的な構成についての説明であり、各カメラは、更に個別の機能を備えることができる。 Note that the above is a description of the basic configuration of a digital camera, and each camera can further have individual functions.
 《交換レンズの電気的構成》
 ここでは、各交換レンズ100が、共通して備える電気的な主要構成について説明する。
<Electrical configuration of interchangeable lens>
Here, an electrical main configuration provided in common to each interchangeable lens 100 will be described.
 図7は、交換レンズの電気的な主要構成を示すブロック図である。同図は、AF機構(AF:Auto Focus/オートフォーカス)、及び、絞りを備えた交換レンズの電気的構成を示している。 FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical main configuration of the interchangeable lens. The figure shows the electrical configuration of an interchangeable lens having an AF mechanism (AF: Auto / Focus) and an aperture.
 同図に示すように、交換レンズ100は、レンズ駆動部110と、レンズ側システム電源生成部112と、レンズマイコン114と、を備える。 As shown in the figure, the interchangeable lens 100 includes a lens driving unit 110, a lens-side system power generation unit 112, and a lens microcomputer 114.
 〈レンズ駆動部〉
 レンズ駆動部110は、レンズマイコン114からの指示に応じて、交換レンズ100を構成する光学部材を駆動する。
<Lens drive unit>
The lens driving unit 110 drives an optical member constituting the interchangeable lens 100 in accordance with an instruction from the lens microcomputer 114.
 上記のように、図7に示す交換レンズ100は、AF機能及び絞りを備えている。このため、本例の交換レンズ100には、レンズ駆動部110として、フォーカス駆動部110A及び絞り駆動部110Cが備えられる。 As described above, the interchangeable lens 100 shown in FIG. 7 has an AF function and a diaphragm. For this reason, the interchangeable lens 100 of this example includes a focus driving unit 110A and a diaphragm driving unit 110C as the lens driving unit 110.
 フォーカス駆動部110Aは、フォーカシング用の光学部材であるフォーカスレンズ106Aを駆動する。フォーカス駆動部110Aは、フォーカスレンズを駆動するためのフォーカス用モーター(たとえば、超音波モーター)、及び、その駆動回路を備えて構成される。フォーカス駆動部110Aは、レンズマイコン114からの指示に応じてフォーカス用モーターを駆動し、フォーカスレンズ106Aを動作させる。 The focus driving unit 110A drives a focus lens 106A that is an optical member for focusing. The focus drive unit 110A includes a focus motor (for example, an ultrasonic motor) for driving the focus lens, and a drive circuit thereof. The focus drive unit 110A drives the focus motor in response to an instruction from the lens microcomputer 114 to operate the focus lens 106A.
 絞り駆動部110Cは、光量調整用の光学部材である絞りを駆動する。絞り駆動部110Cは、絞り106Cを駆動するための絞り用モーター、及び、その駆動回路を備えて構成される。絞り駆動部110Cは、レンズマイコン114からの指示に応じて絞り用モーターを駆動し、絞り106Cを動作させる。 The aperture driving unit 110C drives an aperture that is an optical member for adjusting the amount of light. The aperture drive unit 110C includes an aperture motor for driving the aperture 106C and a drive circuit thereof. The aperture driving unit 110C drives the aperture motor in response to an instruction from the lens microcomputer 114 to operate the aperture 106C.
 後述するように、レンズ駆動部110には、レンズ側端子群LCGの複数の端子LC2~LC4(電源端子)から電圧の異なる複数のレンズ駆動用電源LV1(+5V)、LV2(+6.5V)、LV3(+10V)が供給される。レンズ駆動部110の各駆動部には、この複数供給されるレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3のいずれかが供給される。たとえば、フォーカス駆動部110Aには、最も高い電圧の第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3が供給され、絞り駆動部110Cには、最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1が供給される。 As will be described later, the lens driving unit 110 includes a plurality of lens driving power supplies LV1 (+ 5V), LV2 (+ 6.5V) having different voltages from a plurality of terminals LC2 to LC4 (power supply terminals) of the lens side terminal group LCG. LV3 (+ 10V) is supplied. Any one of the plurality of lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 supplied to each driving unit of the lens driving unit 110 is supplied. For example, the third lens driving power source LV3 having the highest voltage is supplied to the focus driving unit 110A, and the first lens driving power source LV1 having the lowest voltage is supplied to the aperture driving unit 110C.
 〈レンズ側システム電源生成部〉
 レンズ側システム電源生成部112は、レンズマイコン114を動作させるためのシステム電源を生成する。レンズ側システム電源生成部112は、カメラ10から供給されるレンズ駆動用電源を使用して、システム電源を生成する。
<Lens side system power generator>
The lens side system power generation unit 112 generates a system power for operating the lens microcomputer 114. The lens-side system power generation unit 112 uses the lens driving power supplied from the camera 10 to generate a system power.
 ここで、レンズマイコン114は、レンズ駆動部110を構成する各駆動部よりも低い電圧で作動する構成とされる。たとえば、+3.3Vで作動する構成とされる。 Here, the lens microcomputer 114 is configured to operate at a voltage lower than that of each driving unit included in the lens driving unit 110. For example, it is configured to operate at + 3.3V.
 レンズ側システム電源生成部112は、カメラ10から供給される複数のレンズ駆動用電源LV1~LV3のうち最も低い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV1(+5V)を使用してシステム電源(+3.3V)を生成し、レンズマイコン114に供給する。この際、レンズ側システム電源生成部112は、抵抗による電圧降下によりシステム電源を生成する。これにより、システム電源の生成に伴うノイズの発生を防止できる。 The lens-side system power supply generation unit 112 uses the lowest lens drive power supply LV1 (+ 5V) among the plurality of lens drive power supplies LV1 to LV3 supplied from the camera 10 to generate a system power supply (+ 3.3V). It is generated and supplied to the lens microcomputer 114. At this time, the lens-side system power supply generation unit 112 generates a system power supply by a voltage drop due to resistance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of noise accompanying the generation of the system power supply.
 このように抵抗による電圧降下によりシステム電源を生成する装置としては、LDOレギュレーターを例示できる。LDOレギュレーターは、リニアレギュレーターの一つであり、パワーMOSFET、パワートランジスタ等のスイッチング素子のオン抵抗を利用して、入力電力を消費することにより所望の出力電圧に変換する。 An LDO regulator can be exemplified as a device that generates a system power supply by a voltage drop due to resistance. The LDO regulator is one of linear regulators, and converts it into a desired output voltage by consuming input power by using on-resistance of switching elements such as a power MOSFET and a power transistor.
 〈レンズマイコン〉
 レンズマイコン114は、交換レンズ100の動作を統括制御する交換レンズ100の制御部である。レンズマイコン114は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に基づいて、交換レンズ100の動作を制御する。
<Lens microcomputer>
The lens microcomputer 114 is a control unit of the interchangeable lens 100 that performs overall control of the operation of the interchangeable lens 100. The lens microcomputer 114 controls the operation of the interchangeable lens 100 based on an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
 レンズマイコン114は、CPU、ROM、及び、RAMを備え、規定のプログラムを実行することにより各種機能を提供する。ROMには、CPUが実行する各種プログラムの他、制御に必要な各種データ等が格納される。 The lens microcomputer 114 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and provides various functions by executing a prescribed program. In addition to various programs executed by the CPU, various data necessary for control are stored in the ROM.
 図8は、レンズマイコンが実現する機能の一例を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the lens microcomputer.
 同図に示すように、レンズマイコン114は、規定のプログラムを実行することにより、フォーカス駆動制御部120、絞り駆動制御部124、及び、レンズ通信部126等として機能する。 As shown in the figure, the lens microcomputer 114 functions as a focus drive control unit 120, an aperture drive control unit 124, a lens communication unit 126, and the like by executing a prescribed program.
 フォーカス駆動制御部120は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に応じて、フォーカス駆動部110Aを制御し、フォーカスレンズ106Aを動作させる。 The focus drive control unit 120 controls the focus drive unit 110A and operates the focus lens 106A in accordance with an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
 絞り駆動制御部124は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に応じて、絞り駆動部110Cを制御し、絞り106Cを動作させる。 The aperture drive control unit 124 controls the aperture drive unit 110C and operates the aperture 106C in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
 レンズ通信部126は、交換レンズ100が装着されたカメラ10と通信する。通信は、レンズマイコン入出力ポート128を介して行われる。レンズマイコン入出力ポート128には、交換レンズ100と通信するための複数の通信用ポートLP1~LP7が備えられる。この通信用ポートLP1~LP7は、カメラマイコン34のカメラマイコン入出力ポート64に備えられた複数の通信用ポートCP1~CP7に対応して設けられる。 The lens communication unit 126 communicates with the camera 10 to which the interchangeable lens 100 is attached. Communication is performed via the lens microcomputer input / output port 128. The lens microcomputer input / output port 128 includes a plurality of communication ports LP1 to LP7 for communicating with the interchangeable lens 100. The communication ports LP1 to LP7 are provided corresponding to the plurality of communication ports CP1 to CP7 provided in the camera microcomputer input / output port 64 of the camera microcomputer 34.
 したがって、第1の通信用ポートLP1は、カメラ10の状態の通知に使用され、第2の通信用ポートLP2は、カメラ10から送信されるVSYNC信号の受信に使用される。 Therefore, the first communication port LP1 is used for notification of the state of the camera 10, and the second communication port LP2 is used for receiving a VSYNC signal transmitted from the camera 10.
 また、第3の通信用ポートLP3、第4の通信用ポートLP4及び第5の通信用ポートLP5は、カメラ10との間の3線式シリアル通信に使用される。なお、第5の通信用ポートLP5は、オープンドレイン出力が可能に構成される。この点については、後述する。 Further, the third communication port LP3, the fourth communication port LP4, and the fifth communication port LP5 are used for three-wire serial communication with the camera 10. The fifth communication port LP5 is configured to be capable of open drain output. This point will be described later.
 また、第6の通信用ポートLP6は、カメラ10との間で単線式シリアル通信を行うための通信用ポートであり、UARTを構成する通信用ポートである。特に、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1では、第6の通信用ポートLP6がTXDポート(TXD:Transmit eXchange Data/データ送信)として使用される。すわち、カメラ10に信号の送信するための通信用ポートとして使用される。 The sixth communication port LP6 is a communication port for performing single-line serial communication with the camera 10, and is a communication port constituting the UART. In particular, in the camera system 1 of the present embodiment, the sixth communication port LP6 is used as a TXD port (TXD: TransmitTranseXchange Data / data transmission). That is, it is used as a communication port for transmitting a signal to the camera 10.
 また、第7の通信用ポートLP7は、カメラ10への状態の通知に使用される。 Further, the seventh communication port LP7 is used for notification of a state to the camera 10.
 カメラ10との間の通信、及び、マウントを介したカメラ10との間の電気的な接続については、後に詳述する。 The communication with the camera 10 and the electrical connection with the camera 10 via the mount will be described in detail later.
 レンズ通信部126は、第3の通信用ポートLP3、第4の通信用ポートLP4及び第5の通信用ポートLP5を使用して、カメラ10との間で3線式シリアル通信を行う際、その通信を確立するために必要な設定を行う。すなわち、レンズ通信部126は、レンズ側通信設定部としても機能する。 When the lens communication unit 126 performs three-wire serial communication with the camera 10 using the third communication port LP3, the fourth communication port LP4, and the fifth communication port LP5, Make the settings necessary to establish communication. That is, the lens communication unit 126 also functions as a lens side communication setting unit.
 交換レンズ100は、上記の基本的な構成の他、たとえば、手ブレ補正機構等を備えることができる。 The interchangeable lens 100 can include, for example, a camera shake correction mechanism in addition to the above basic configuration.
 《カメラと交換レンズと電気的な接続》
 図9は、カメラと交換レンズとの電気的な接続を示す図である。
<Electric connection between camera and interchangeable lens>
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an electrical connection between the camera and the interchangeable lens.
 同図に示すように、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100は、カメラ側マウント14に備えられたカメラ側端子群CCGと、レンズ側マウント104に備えられたレンズ側端子群LCGを介して電気的に接続される。 As shown in the figure, the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are electrically connected via a camera side terminal group CCG provided in the camera side mount 14 and a lens side terminal group LCG provided in the lens side mount 104. Is done.
 なお、図9において、矢印Rで示す方向が、カメラ10に交換レンズ100を装着する場合の交換レンズ100の回転方向である。したがって、カメラ10に交換レンズ100を装着する場合、カメラ側端子群CCGに対して、レンズ側端子群LCGは、図9中の矢印Rで示す方向に移動する。 In FIG. 9, the direction indicated by the arrow R is the rotation direction of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the lens side terminal group LCG moves in the direction indicated by the arrow R in FIG. 9 with respect to the camera side terminal group CCG.
 〈カメラ側端子群〉
 カメラ側端子群CCGは、12個の端子CC1~CC12で構成される。各端子CC1~CC12は、同一形状を有し、同一の円周上に一定の間隔で配置される。
<Camera side terminal group>
The camera side terminal group CCG is composed of 12 terminals CC1 to CC12. Each of the terminals CC1 to CC12 has the same shape and is arranged at a constant interval on the same circumference.
 (A)第1の端子CC1
 第1の端子CC1は、交換レンズ100の装着を検出するためのレンズ検出端子である。第1の端子CC1は、カメラマイコン34のレンズ検出用ポートCP0に接続される。また、第1の端子CC1は、プルアップ抵抗CR1を介して電源供給部42(図5参照)に接続され、所定の電位(たとえば、+3.3V)にプルアップされる。
(A) First terminal CC1
The first terminal CC1 is a lens detection terminal for detecting the mounting of the interchangeable lens 100. The first terminal CC1 is connected to the lens detection port CP0 of the camera microcomputer 34. The first terminal CC1 is connected to the power supply unit 42 (see FIG. 5) via the pull-up resistor CR1 and pulled up to a predetermined potential (for example, +3.3 V).
 (B)第2の端子CC2~第4の端子CC4
 第2の端子CC2、第3の端子CC3及び第4の端子CC4は、交換レンズ100に複数のレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3を供給するための複数の電源端子である。
(B) Second terminal CC2 to fourth terminal CC4
The second terminal CC2, the third terminal CC3, and the fourth terminal CC4 are a plurality of power supply terminals for supplying a plurality of lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 to the interchangeable lens 100.
 ここで、第2の端子CC2は、交換レンズに第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1を供給するための第1の電源端子である。第2の端子CC2は、レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44を介して電源供給部42に接続される(図5参照)。第2の端子CC2には、電源供給部42から最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1が供給される。レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に応じて、第2の端子CC2への第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1の供給をオンオフする。 Here, the second terminal CC2 is a first power supply terminal for supplying the first lens driving power supply LV1 to the interchangeable lens. The second terminal CC2 is connected to the power supply unit 42 via the lens driving power switch unit 44 (see FIG. 5). The first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage is supplied from the power supply section 42 to the second terminal CC2. The lens driving power switch unit 44 turns on and off the supply of the first lens driving power supply LV1 to the second terminal CC2 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
 また、第3の端子CC3は、交換レンズに第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2を供給するための第2の電源端子である。第3の端子CC3は、レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44を介して電源供給部42に接続される(図5参照)。第3の端子CC3には、電源供給部42から第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2が供給される。レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に応じて、第3の端子CC3への第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2の供給をオンオフする。 The third terminal CC3 is a second power supply terminal for supplying the second lens driving power supply LV2 to the interchangeable lens. The third terminal CC3 is connected to the power supply unit 42 via the lens driving power switch unit 44 (see FIG. 5). A second lens driving power supply LV2 is supplied from the power supply unit 42 to the third terminal CC3. The lens driving power switch 44 turns on / off the supply of the second lens driving power LV2 to the third terminal CC3 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
 また、第4の端子CC4は、交換レンズに第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3を供給するための第3の電源端子である。第4の端子CC4は、レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44を介して電源供給部42に接続される(図5参照)。第4の端子CC4には、電源供給部42から最も高い電圧の第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3が供給される。レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44は、カメラマイコン34からの指示に応じて、第4の端子CC4への第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3の供給をオンオフする。 The fourth terminal CC4 is a third power supply terminal for supplying the third lens driving power supply LV3 to the interchangeable lens. The fourth terminal CC4 is connected to the power supply unit 42 via the lens driving power switch unit 44 (see FIG. 5). The fourth lens CC4 is supplied with the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage from the power supply unit. The lens driving power switch unit 44 turns on / off the supply of the third lens driving power supply LV3 to the fourth terminal CC4 in response to an instruction from the camera microcomputer 34.
 (C)第5の端子CC5及び第6の端子CC6
 第5の端子CC5及び第6の端子CC6は、それぞれグランド端子であり、共に接地される。
(C) Fifth terminal CC5 and sixth terminal CC6
The fifth terminal CC5 and the sixth terminal CC6 are ground terminals, and are both grounded.
 (D)第7の端子CC7~第12の端子CC12
 第7の端子CC7~第12の端子CC12は、交換レンズ100との間で通信するための通信端子である。
(D) Seventh terminal CC7 to twelfth terminal CC12
The seventh terminal CC7 to the twelfth terminal CC12 are communication terminals for communicating with the interchangeable lens 100.
 ここで、第7の端子CC7は、交換レンズ100からカメラ10に状態を通知するための通信端子である。第7の端子CC7は、カメラマイコン34の第1の通信用ポートCP1に接続される。上記のように、カメラマイコン34の第1の通信用ポートCP1は、交換レンズ100の所定の機能が動作中であることを通知するために使用される。 Here, the seventh terminal CC7 is a communication terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. The seventh terminal CC7 is connected to the first communication port CP1 of the camera microcomputer 34. As described above, the first communication port CP1 of the camera microcomputer 34 is used to notify that a predetermined function of the interchangeable lens 100 is in operation.
 第8の端子CC8は、カメラ10から交換レンズ100にVSYNC信号を送信するための通信端子である。第8の端子CC8は、カメラマイコン34の第2の通信用ポートCP2に接続される。 The eighth terminal CC8 is a communication terminal for transmitting a VSYNC signal from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100. The eighth terminal CC8 is connected to the second communication port CP2 of the camera microcomputer 34.
 第9の端子CC9、第10の端子CC10及び第11の端子CC11は、それぞれ交換レンズ100との間で3線式シリアル通信を行うための通信端子である。第9の端子CC9は、カメラマイコン34の第3の通信用ポートCP3(MOSIポート)に接続される。第10の端子CC10は、カメラマイコン34の第4の通信用ポートCP4(SCKポート)に接続される。第11の端子CC11は、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5(MISOポート)に接続される。 The ninth terminal CC9, the tenth terminal CC10, and the eleventh terminal CC11 are communication terminals for performing three-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, respectively. The ninth terminal CC9 is connected to the third communication port CP3 (MOSI port) of the camera microcomputer 34. The tenth terminal CC10 is connected to the fourth communication port CP4 (SCK port) of the camera microcomputer 34. The eleventh terminal CC11 is connected to the fifth communication port CP5 (MISO port) of the camera microcomputer 34.
 ここで、上記のように、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5は、オープンドレイン出力が可能なポートで構成される。したがって、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5(MISOポート)に接続される第11の端子CC11は、オープンドレイン出力が可能な端子として構成される。第11の端子CC11は、カメラ側通信端子の一例であり、この第11の端子CC11の極性に基づいて、カメラ10に装着された交換レンズ100が特定の機能に対応しているか否かが判定される。この点については、後に詳述する。 Here, as described above, the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is configured by a port capable of open drain output. Therefore, the eleventh terminal CC11 connected to the fifth communication port CP5 (MISO port) of the camera microcomputer 34 is configured as a terminal capable of open drain output. The eleventh terminal CC11 is an example of a camera-side communication terminal. Based on the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11, it is determined whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10 corresponds to a specific function. Is done. This will be described in detail later.
 また、第9の端子CC9、第10の端子CC10及び第11の端子CC11は、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100がシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の一例である。 Also, the ninth terminal CC9, the tenth terminal CC10, and the eleventh terminal CC11 are examples of a plurality of terminals used when the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 perform serial communication.
 第12の端子CC12は、カメラ側拡張通信端子の一例である。第12の端子CC12は、交換レンズ100との間で単線式シリアル通信を行うための端子であり、かつ、第12の端子CC12は、交換レンズ100からカメラ10に状態を通知するための端子である。第12の端子CC12は、カメラマイコン34の第6の通信用ポートCP6及び第7の通信用ポートCP7に接続される。 The twelfth terminal CC12 is an example of a camera side extended communication terminal. The twelfth terminal CC12 is a terminal for performing single-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, and the twelfth terminal CC12 is a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. is there. The twelfth terminal CC12 is connected to the sixth communication port CP6 and the seventh communication port CP7 of the camera microcomputer 34.
 カメラ側端子群CCGを構成する複数の端子CC1~CC12は、カメラ10に交換レンズ100を装着する場合の交換レンズ100の回転方向Rに対して、第1の端子CC1、第2の端子CC2、…、第11の端子CC11、第12の端子CC12の順で配置される。したがって、カメラ側端子群CCGは、レンズ検出端子(第1の端子CC1)、複数の電源端子(第2の端子CC2~第4の端子CC4)、複数のグランド端子(第5の端子CC5及び第6の端子CC6)、複数の通信端子(第7の端子CC7~第12の端子CC12)の順で配置される。 The plurality of terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG are the first terminal CC1, the second terminal CC2, and the rotation direction R of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10. ..., the eleventh terminal CC11 and the twelfth terminal CC12 are arranged in this order. Accordingly, the camera-side terminal group CCG includes a lens detection terminal (first terminal CC1), a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2 to fourth terminal CC4), and a plurality of ground terminals (fifth terminal CC5 and fifth terminal CC5). 6 terminals CC6) and a plurality of communication terminals (seventh terminal CC7 to twelfth terminal CC12).
 〈レンズ側端子群〉
 レンズ側端子群LCGは、カメラ側端子群CCGに対応している。したがって、カメラ側端子群CCGを構成する端子と同じ数の端子で構成され、かつ、各端子LC1~LC12は、カメラ側端子群CCGを構成する端子CC1~CC12と同じ間隔で配置される。
<Lens side terminal group>
The lens side terminal group LCG corresponds to the camera side terminal group CCG. Accordingly, it is configured with the same number of terminals as the terminals constituting the camera side terminal group CCG, and the terminals LC1 to LC12 are arranged at the same intervals as the terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG.
 (A)第1の端子LC1
 第1の端子LC1は、カメラ側のレンズ検出端子(第1の端子CC1)に対応したレンズ検出端子である。したがって、交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、第1の端子LC1は、カメラ側の第1の端子CC1に接続される。第1の端子LC1は、プルダウン抵抗LR1を介して接地され、グランドの電位にプルダウンされる。
(A) First terminal LC1
The first terminal LC1 is a lens detection terminal corresponding to the lens detection terminal (first terminal CC1) on the camera side. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the first terminal LC1 is connected to the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. The first terminal LC1 is grounded via the pull-down resistor LR1, and is pulled down to the ground potential.
 (B)第2の端子LC2、第3の端子LC3及び第4の端子LC4
 第2の端子LC2、第3の端子LC3及び第4の端子LC4は、カメラ側の複数の電源端子(第2の端子CC2、第3の端子CC3及び第4の端子CC4)に対応した複数の電源端子である。したがって、交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、第2の端子LC2は、カメラ側の第2の端子CC2に接続され、第3の端子LC3は、カメラ側の第3の端子CC3に接続される。また、第4の端子LC4はカメラ側の第4の端子CC4に接続される。
(B) Second terminal LC2, third terminal LC3, and fourth terminal LC4
The second terminal LC2, the third terminal LC3, and the fourth terminal LC4 are a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) on the camera side. Power supply terminal. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the second terminal LC2 is connected to the second terminal CC2 on the camera side, and the third terminal LC3 is connected to the third terminal CC3 on the camera side. . The fourth terminal LC4 is connected to the camera-side fourth terminal CC4.
 上記のように、カメラ側の第2の端子CC2は、電圧の最も低い第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1(+5V)を供給するための第1の電源端子である。したがって、交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、第2の端子LC2には、最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1が供給される。 As described above, the second terminal CC2 on the camera side is a first power supply terminal for supplying the first lens driving power supply LV1 (+5 V) having the lowest voltage. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage is supplied to the second terminal LC2.
 この第2の端子LC2には、交換レンズ内において、レンズ側システム電源生成部112が接続される。レンズ側システム電源生成部112は、第2の端子LC2から供給される第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1(+5V)を使用して、システム電源(+3.3V)を生成し、レンズマイコン114に供給する。 The lens side system power generation unit 112 is connected to the second terminal LC2 in the interchangeable lens. The lens-side system power supply generation unit 112 generates a system power supply (+3.3 V) using the first lens driving power supply LV1 (+5 V) supplied from the second terminal LC2, and supplies the system power supply to the lens microcomputer 114. To do.
 また、カメラ側の第3の端子CC3は、第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2(+6.5V)を供給するための第2の電源端子である。したがって、交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、第3の端子LC3には、第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2が供給される。 The third terminal CC3 on the camera side is a second power supply terminal for supplying a second lens driving power supply LV2 (+6.5 V). Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the second lens driving power supply LV2 is supplied to the third terminal LC3.
 また、カメラ側の第4の端子CC4は、最も高い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV3(+10V)を供給するための第3の電源端子である。したがって、交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、カメラ側の第4の端子CC4に最も高い電圧の第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3が供給される。 The fourth terminal CC4 on the camera side is a third power supply terminal for supplying the lens driving power supply LV3 (+ 10V) having the highest voltage. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage is supplied to the fourth terminal CC4 on the camera side.
 (C)第5の端子LC5及び第6の端子LC6
 第5の端子LC5及び第6の端子LC6は、それぞれカメラ側の二つグランド端子(第5の端子CC5及び第6の端子CC6)に対応した二つのグランド端子である。したがって、交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、第5の端子LC5がカメラ側の第5の端子CC5に接続され、第6の端子LC6がカメラ側の第6の端子CC6に接続される。
(C) Fifth terminal LC5 and sixth terminal LC6
The fifth terminal LC5 and the sixth terminal LC6 are two ground terminals corresponding to two ground terminals (fifth terminal CC5 and sixth terminal CC6) on the camera side, respectively. Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the fifth terminal LC5 is connected to the fifth terminal CC5 on the camera side, and the sixth terminal LC6 is connected to the sixth terminal CC6 on the camera side.
 (D)第7の端子LC7~第12の端子LC12
 第7の端子LC7~第12の端子LC12は、カメラ側の複数の通信端子(第7の端子CC7~第12の端子CC12)に対応した複数の通信端子である。したがって、交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、第7の端子LC7がカメラ側の第7の端子CC7に接続され、第8の端子LC8がカメラ側の第8の端子CC8に接続される。また、第9の端子LC9がカメラ側の第9の端子CC9に接続され、第10の端子LC10がカメラ側の第10の端子CC10に接続される。更に、第11の端子LC11がカメラ側の第11の端子CC11に接続され、第12の端子LC12がカメラ側の第12の端子CC12に接続される。
(D) Seventh terminal LC7 to twelfth terminal LC12
The seventh terminal LC7 to the twelfth terminal LC12 are a plurality of communication terminals corresponding to the plurality of communication terminals on the camera side (seventh terminal CC7 to twelfth terminal CC12). Therefore, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the seventh terminal LC7 is connected to the camera-side seventh terminal CC7, and the eighth terminal LC8 is connected to the camera-side eighth terminal CC8. The ninth terminal LC9 is connected to the camera-side ninth terminal CC9, and the tenth terminal LC10 is connected to the camera-side tenth terminal CC10. Further, the eleventh terminal LC11 is connected to the eleventh terminal CC11 on the camera side, and the twelfth terminal LC12 is connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 on the camera side.
 上記のように、カメラ側の第7の端子CC7は、交換レンズ100からカメラ10に状態を通知するための通信端子である。したがって、第7の端子LC7も交換レンズ100からカメラ10に状態を通知するための通信端子として使用される。第7の端子LC7は、レンズマイコン114の第1の通信用ポートLP1に接続される。 As described above, the seventh terminal CC7 on the camera side is a communication terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. Accordingly, the seventh terminal LC7 is also used as a communication terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. The seventh terminal LC7 is connected to the first communication port LP1 of the lens microcomputer 114.
 また、カメラ側の第8の端子CC8は、カメラ10から交換レンズ100にVSYNC信号を送信するための通信端子である。したがって、第8の端子LC8は、カメラ側から送信されたVSYNC信号を受信するための通信端子として使用される。第8の端子LC8は、レンズマイコン114の第2の通信用ポートLP2に接続される。 The camera-side eighth terminal CC8 is a communication terminal for transmitting a VSYNC signal from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100. Therefore, the eighth terminal LC8 is used as a communication terminal for receiving the VSYNC signal transmitted from the camera side. The eighth terminal LC8 is connected to the second communication port LP2 of the lens microcomputer 114.
 また、カメラ側の第9の端子CC9、第10の端子CC10及び第11の端子CC11は、それぞれ交換レンズ100との間で3線式シリアル通信を行うための通信端子である。したがって、第9の端子LC9、第10の端子LC10及び第11の端子LC11もカメラ10との間で3線式シリアル通信を行うための通信端子として使用される。第9の端子LC9は、レンズマイコン114の第3の通信用ポートLP3に接続される。第10の端子LC10は、レンズマイコン114の第4の通信用ポートLP4に接続される。第11の端子LC11は、レンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5に接続される。 The camera-side ninth terminal CC9, tenth terminal CC10, and eleventh terminal CC11 are communication terminals for performing three-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, respectively. Accordingly, the ninth terminal LC9, the tenth terminal LC10, and the eleventh terminal LC11 are also used as communication terminals for performing three-wire serial communication with the camera 10. The ninth terminal LC9 is connected to the third communication port LP3 of the lens microcomputer 114. The tenth terminal LC10 is connected to the fourth communication port LP4 of the lens microcomputer 114. The eleventh terminal LC11 is connected to the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114.
 ここで、上記のように、レンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5は、オープンドレイン出力が可能なポートで構成される。したがって、レンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5(MISOポート)に接続される第11の端子LC11は、オープンドレイン出力が可能な端子として構成される。第11の端子LC11は、レンズ側通信端子の一例であり、この第11の端子LC11の極性に基づいて、装着先のカメラ10が特定の機能に対応しているか否かが判定される。この点については、後に詳述する。 Here, as described above, the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is configured by a port capable of open drain output. Therefore, the eleventh terminal LC11 connected to the fifth communication port LP5 (MISO port) of the lens microcomputer 114 is configured as a terminal capable of open drain output. The eleventh terminal LC11 is an example of a lens side communication terminal, and based on the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11, it is determined whether or not the attached camera 10 is compatible with a specific function. This will be described in detail later.
 また、第9の端子LC9、第10の端子LC10及び第11の端子LC11は、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100がシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の一例である。 Further, the ninth terminal LC9, the tenth terminal LC10, and the eleventh terminal LC11 are examples of a plurality of terminals used when the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 perform serial communication.
 また、カメラ側の第12の端子CC12は、交換レンズ100との間で単線式シリアル通信を行うための端子であり、かつ、交換レンズ100からカメラ10に状態を通知するための端子である。したがって、第12の端子LC12もカメラ10との間で単線式シリアル通信を行うための端子、及び、カメラ10に状態を通知するための端子として機能する。第12の端子LC12は、レンズマイコン114の第6の通信用ポートLP6及び第7の通信用ポートLP7に接続される。第12の端子LC12は、レンズ側拡張通信端子の一例である。 The camera-side twelfth terminal CC12 is a terminal for performing single-wire serial communication with the interchangeable lens 100, and is a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state from the interchangeable lens 100. Accordingly, the twelfth terminal LC12 also functions as a terminal for performing single-wire serial communication with the camera 10 and a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state. The twelfth terminal LC12 is connected to the sixth communication port LP6 and the seventh communication port LP7 of the lens microcomputer 114. The twelfth terminal LC12 is an example of a lens side extended communication terminal.
 なお、図9に示すように、通信端子を構成する複数の端子(第7の端子LC7~第12の端子LC12)のうち第7の端子LC7、第8の端子LC8及び第12の端子LC12は、それぞれプルアップ抵抗LR7、LR8、LR12を介してレンズ側システム電源生成部112に接続され、レンズ側システム電源生成部112から供給されるシステム電源の電位(たとえば、+3.3V)にプルアップされる。 As shown in FIG. 9, among the plurality of terminals (seventh terminal LC7 to twelfth terminal LC12) constituting the communication terminal, the seventh terminal LC7, the eighth terminal LC8 and the twelfth terminal LC12 are Are connected to the lens-side system power generation unit 112 via the pull-up resistors LR7, LR8, and LR12, respectively, and are pulled up to the potential of the system power supply (for example, +3.3 V) supplied from the lens-side system power generation unit 112. The
 また、通信端子を構成する複数の端子(第7の端子LC7~第12の端子LC12)のうち第9の端子LC9は、プルダウン抵抗LR9を介して接地され、グランドの電位にプルダウンされる。 Also, the ninth terminal LC9 among the plurality of terminals (seventh terminal LC7 to twelfth terminal LC12) constituting the communication terminal is grounded via the pull-down resistor LR9 and pulled down to the ground potential.
 レンズ側端子群LCGを構成する複数の端子LC1~LC12もカメラ側端子群CCGを構成する複数の端子CC1~CC12と同じ並びで配置される。すなわち、カメラ10に交換レンズ100を装着する場合の交換レンズ100の回転方向Rに対して、第1の端子LC1、第2の端子LC2、…、第11の端子LC11、第12の端子LC12の順で配置される。したがって、レンズ側端子群LCGもレンズ検出端子(第1の端子LC1)、複数の電源端子(第2の端子LC2~第4の端子LC4)、複数のグランド端子(第5の端子LC5及び第6の端子LC6)、複数の通信端子(第7の端子LC7~第12の端子LC12)の順で配置される。 The plurality of terminals LC1 to LC12 constituting the lens side terminal group LCG are also arranged in the same arrangement as the plurality of terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG. That is, the first terminal LC1, the second terminal LC2,..., The eleventh terminal LC11, and the twelfth terminal LC12 with respect to the rotation direction R of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10. Arranged in order. Therefore, the lens side terminal group LCG also includes a lens detection terminal (first terminal LC1), a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4), and a plurality of ground terminals (fifth terminal LC5 and sixth terminal LC5). Terminal LC6) and a plurality of communication terminals (seventh terminal LC7 to twelfth terminal LC12) in this order.
 《互換性判定に係わる機能》
 図10は、カメラ及び交換レンズに備えられた互換性判定に係わる機能のブロック図である。
<Functions related to compatibility determination>
FIG. 10 is a block diagram of functions related to compatibility determination provided in the camera and the interchangeable lens.
 〈カメラ側に備えられる互換性判定機能〉
 上記のように、カメラ10は、第11の端子CC11が、カメラ側通信端子として機能し、この第11の端子CC11の極性に基づいて、カメラ10に装着された交換レンズ100が、特定の機能に対応しているか否かが判定される。
<Compatibility judgment function provided on the camera>
As described above, in the camera 10, the eleventh terminal CC11 functions as a camera-side communication terminal, and the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10 has a specific function based on the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11. It is determined whether or not
 なお、判定対象とする機能は、あらかじめ定められる。一例として、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1では、カメラ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子CC12)及びレンズ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子LC12)を使用して、交換レンズ100からカメラ10にレンズ情報を送信する機能が判定対象とされる。カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方が当該機能に対応している場合、カメラ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子CC12)及びレンズ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子LC12)を使用して、交換レンズ100からカメラ10に単線式シリアル通信でレンズ情報が送信される。カメラ10は、送信されたレンズ情報を受信して、装着された交換レンズ100のレンズ情報を取得する。この点については、後に詳述する。 Note that the function to be determined is determined in advance. As an example, in the camera system 1 of the present embodiment, the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12) are used to connect the camera 10 to the camera 10. A function for transmitting lens information is determined. When both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are compatible with the function, the interchangeable lens is used by using the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12). Lens information is transmitted from 100 to the camera 10 by single-wire serial communication. The camera 10 receives the transmitted lens information and acquires the lens information of the attached interchangeable lens 100. This will be described in detail later.
 第11の端子CC11は、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5(MISOポート)に接続される。上記のように、この第5の通信用ポートCP5は、オープンドレイン出力が可能なポートである。 The eleventh terminal CC11 is connected to the fifth communication port CP5 (MISO port) of the camera microcomputer 34. As described above, the fifth communication port CP5 is a port capable of open drain output.
 カメラマイコン34は、この第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を第1極性であるHIGHレベル又は第2極性であるLOWレベルに設定する機能を有する。この機能は、カメラ側通信端子極性設定部70によって提供される。カメラマイコン34は、所定のプログラムを実行することにより、カメラ側通信端子極性設定部70として機能する。カメラ側通信端子極性設定部70は、カメラ10が、特定の機能に対応している場合、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を第1極性であるHIGHレベルに設定する。一方、カメラ10が特定の機能に対応していない場合、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を第2極性であるLOWレベルに設定する。 The camera microcomputer 34 has a function of setting the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity or the LOW level that is the second polarity. This function is provided by the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit 70. The camera microcomputer 34 functions as the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit 70 by executing a predetermined program. When the camera 10 supports a specific function, the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit 70 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity. On the other hand, when the camera 10 does not support a specific function, the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is set to the LOW level that is the second polarity.
 カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5が、HIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定されることにより、第11の端子CC11がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定される。また、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5が、LOWレベル(第2極性)に設定されることにより、第11の端子CC11がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定される。 When the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is set to HIGH level (first polarity), the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
 また、カメラマイコン34は、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を検出し、検出した極性に基づいて、カメラ10に装着された交換レンズ100が特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定する機能を有する。この機能は、カメラ側判定部72によって提供される。カメラマイコン34は、所定のプログラムを実行することにより、カメラ側判定部72として機能する。カメラ側判定部72は、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を検出し、検出した極性がHIGHレベル(第1極性)の場合にのみ、カメラ10に装着された交換レンズ100が特定の機能に対応していると判定する。 The camera microcomputer 34 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5, and determines whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10 corresponds to a specific function based on the detected polarity. It has a function. This function is provided by the camera side determination unit 72. The camera microcomputer 34 functions as the camera side determination unit 72 by executing a predetermined program. The camera side determination unit 72 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5, and the interchangeable lens 100 attached to the camera 10 has a specific function only when the detected polarity is HIGH level (first polarity). Judge that it corresponds.
 なお、第11の端子CC11がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定されることにより、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定される。また、第11の端子CC11がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定されることにより、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定される。 Note that the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is set to the HIGH level (first polarity) by setting the eleventh terminal CC11 to the HIGH level (first polarity). Further, by setting the eleventh terminal CC11 to the LOW level (second polarity), the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
 〈交換レンズ側に備えられる互換性判定機能〉
 上記のように、交換レンズ100は、第11の端子LC11が、レンズ側通信端子として機能し、この第11の端子LC11の極性に基づいて、装着先のカメラ10が、特定の機能に対応しているか否かが判定される。
<Compatibility determination function provided on the interchangeable lens side>
As described above, in the interchangeable lens 100, the eleventh terminal LC11 functions as a lens-side communication terminal, and the camera 10 as the mounting destination corresponds to a specific function based on the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11. It is determined whether or not.
 第11の端子LC11は、レンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5(MISOポート)に接続される。上記のように、この第5の通信用ポートLP5は、オープンドレイン出力が可能なポートである。 The eleventh terminal LC11 is connected to the fifth communication port LP5 (MISO port) of the lens microcomputer 114. As described above, the fifth communication port LP5 is a port capable of open drain output.
 レンズマイコン114は、この第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を第1極性であるHIGHレベル又は第2極性であるLOWレベルに設定する機能を有する。この機能は、レンズ側通信端子極性設定部130によって提供される。レンズマイコン114は、所定のプログラムを実行することにより、レンズ側通信端子極性設定部130として機能する。レンズ側通信端子極性設定部130は、交換レンズ100が、特定の機能に対応している場合、第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を第1極性であるHIGHレベルに設定する。一方、交換レンズ100が特定の機能に対応していない場合、第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を第2極性であるLOWレベルに設定する。 The lens microcomputer 114 has a function of setting the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity or the LOW level that is the second polarity. This function is provided by the lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit 130. The lens microcomputer 114 functions as the lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit 130 by executing a predetermined program. When the interchangeable lens 100 supports a specific function, the lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit 130 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity. On the other hand, when the interchangeable lens 100 does not support a specific function, the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is set to the LOW level that is the second polarity.
 レンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5が、HIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定されることにより、第11の端子LC11がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定される。また、レンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5が、LOWレベル(第2極性)に設定されることにより、第11の端子LC11がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定される。 When the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is set to HIGH level (first polarity), the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
 また、レンズマイコン114は、第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を検出し、検出した極性に基づいて、装着先のカメラ10が特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定する機能を有する。この機能は、レンズ側判定部132によって提供される。レンズマイコン114は、所定のプログラムを実行することにより、レンズ側判定部132として機能する。レンズ側判定部132は、第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を検出し、検出した極性がHIGHレベル(第1極性)の場合にのみ、装着先のカメラ10が特定の機能に対応していると判定する。 In addition, the lens microcomputer 114 has a function of detecting the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 and determining whether or not the attached camera 10 is compatible with a specific function based on the detected polarity. This function is provided by the lens side determination unit 132. The lens microcomputer 114 functions as the lens side determination unit 132 by executing a predetermined program. The lens-side determination unit 132 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5, and only when the detected polarity is the HIGH level (first polarity), the camera 10 as the attachment destination corresponds to a specific function. Is determined.
 なお、第11の端子LC11がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定されることにより、レンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定される。また、第11の端子LC11がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定されることにより、レンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定される。 The eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the HIGH level (first polarity), so that the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is set to the HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
 〈カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性〉
 交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着すると、カメラ側通信端子であるカメラ側の第11の端子CC11と、レンズ側通信端子である交換レンズ側の第11の端子LC11とが接続される。この結果、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5とレンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5とが接続される。
<Polarity of camera side communication terminal and lens side communication terminal>
When the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, an eleventh terminal CC11 on the camera side that is a camera side communication terminal and an eleventh terminal LC11 on the interchangeable lens side that is a lens side communication terminal are connected. As a result, the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 and the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 are connected.
 ここで、上記のように、カメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5及びレンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5は、オープンドレイン出力が可能であり、それぞれHIGHレベル(第1極性)又はLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定されると、極性が次のように設定される。すなわち、両方ともHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定された場合にのみ、両方ともHIGHレベル(第1極性)になり、少なくとも一方がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定されると、両方ともLOWレベル(第2極性)になる。したがって、出力設定後のカメラマイコン34の第5の通信用ポートCP5及びレンズマイコン114の第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を検出すれば、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方が特定の機能に対応しているか否か、すなわち、互換性を有するか否かを判定できる。 Here, as described above, the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 and the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 are capable of open drain output, and are each at a HIGH level (first polarity) or When set to the LOW level (second polarity), the polarity is set as follows. That is, both are set to HIGH level (first polarity) only when both are set to HIGH level (first polarity), and both are set to LOW when at least one is set to LOW level (second polarity). Level (second polarity). Therefore, if the polarities of the fifth communication port CP5 of the camera microcomputer 34 and the fifth communication port LP5 of the lens microcomputer 114 after the output setting are detected, both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 correspond to a specific function. It can be determined whether or not compatibility is achieved.
 カメラ側判定部72は、出力設定後の第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性(=第11の端子CC11の極性)を検出し、検出した極性がHIGHレベル(第1極性)の場合にのみ、装着された交換レンズ100が特定の機能に対応していると判定する。すなわち、互換性のある交換レンズ100であると判定する。 The camera side determination unit 72 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 after the output setting (= the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11), and only when the detected polarity is the HIGH level (first polarity). It is determined that the attached interchangeable lens 100 corresponds to a specific function. That is, it is determined that the interchangeable lens 100 is compatible.
 同様にレンズ側判定部132は、出力設定後の第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性(=第11の端子LC11の極性)を検出し、検出したHIGHレベル(第1極性)の場合にのみ、装着先のカメラ10が特定の機能に対応していると判定する。すなわち、互換性のあるカメラ10であると判定する。 Similarly, the lens side determination unit 132 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 (= the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11) after the output setting, and only when the detected HIGH level (first polarity) is detected. It determines with the camera 10 of a mounting destination corresponding to a specific function. That is, it is determined that the camera 10 is compatible.
 図11は、特定の機能への対応状況に応じたカメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の出力設定と検出される極性との関係を示す表である。 FIG. 11 is a table showing the relationship between the output settings of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal and the detected polarity in accordance with the corresponding status of a specific function.
 同図に示すように、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100は、特定の機能に対応している場合、そのカメラ側通信端子(第11の端子CC11)及びレンズ側通信端子(第11の端子LC11)の出力設定がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定される。一方、特定の機能に対応していない場合、そのカメラ側通信端子(第11の端子CC11)及びレンズ側通信端子(第11の端子LC11)の出力設定がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定される。 As shown in the figure, when the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 correspond to a specific function, the camera side communication terminal (eleventh terminal CC11) and the lens side communication terminal (eleventh terminal LC11) are connected. The output setting is set to HIGH level (first polarity). On the other hand, if the specific function is not supported, the output settings of the camera side communication terminal (11th terminal CC11) and the lens side communication terminal (11th terminal LC11) are set to the LOW level (second polarity). The
 また、出力設定後のカメラ側通信端子(第11の端子CC11)及びレンズ側通信端子(第11の端子LC11)は、両方ともHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定された場合にのみ、両方ともHIGHレベル(第1極性)になり、少なくとも一方がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定された場合は、両方ともLOWレベル(第2極性)になる。 Further, both the camera side communication terminal (11th terminal CC11) and the lens side communication terminal (11th terminal LC11) after the output setting are both set to HIGH level (first polarity). When the level is HIGH (first polarity) and at least one is set to LOW level (second polarity), both are LOW level (second polarity).
 このように、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1では、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の極性を検出すれば、カメラ10と交換レンズ100の相互で互換性の有無を判定できる。 As described above, in the camera system 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are compatible can be determined by detecting the polarities of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal.
 [カメラシステムの作用]
 《交換レンズの装着》
 交換レンズ100に備えられたレンズ側マウント104をカメラ10に備えられたカメラ側マウント14に装着することにより、交換レンズ100がカメラ10に装着される。この際、カメラ10に対して交換レンズ100を回転させて装着する。
[Operation of camera system]
<Attaching an interchangeable lens>
The interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10 by attaching the lens side mount 104 provided in the interchangeable lens 100 to the camera side mount 14 provided in the camera 10. At this time, the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated and attached to the camera 10.
 交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着することにより、レンズ側マウント104に備えられたレンズ側端子群LCGがカメラ側マウント14に備えられたカメラ側端子群CCGに接続される。 By attaching the interchangeable lens 100 to the camera 10, the lens side terminal group LCG provided in the lens side mount 104 is connected to the camera side terminal group CCG provided in the camera side mount 14.
 交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着する際、レンズ側端子群LCGは、回転方向に沿ってレンズ検出端子(第1の端子LC1)、複数の電源端子(第2の端子LC2~第4の端子LC4)、複数のグランド端子(第5の端子LC5及び第6の端子LC6)、複数の通信端子(第7の端子LC7~第12の端子LC12)の順で配置されるので、電源端子(第2の端子LC2~第4の端子LC4)をより多くカメラ側端子群CCGの端子に接触させることができる。これにより、レンズ側端子群LCGの複数の電源端子(第2の端子LC2~第4の端子LC4)のセルフクリーニング効果を向上できる。この結果、レンズ側端子群LCGの複数の電源端子(第2の端子LC2~第4の端子LC4)の接触抵抗を低減でき、効率よく電源を供給できる。 When the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, the lens side terminal group LCG includes a lens detection terminal (first terminal LC1) and a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4) along the rotation direction. ), A plurality of ground terminals (fifth terminal LC5 and sixth terminal LC6), and a plurality of communication terminals (seventh terminal LC7 to twelfth terminal LC12) are arranged in this order. More terminals LC2 to LC4) can be brought into contact with the terminals of the camera side terminal group CCG. Thereby, the self-cleaning effect of the plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4) of the lens side terminal group LCG can be improved. As a result, the contact resistance of the plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4) of the lens side terminal group LCG can be reduced, and power can be supplied efficiently.
 《交換レンズの装着の検出》
 カメラマイコン34は、カメラ側端子群CCGの第1の端子(レンズ検出端子)CC1の極性に基づいて、交換レンズ100の装着の有無を検出する。
<Detection of attached interchangeable lens>
The camera microcomputer 34 detects whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 is attached based on the polarity of the first terminal (lens detection terminal) CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
 交換レンズ100が装着されていない場合、カメラ側の第1の端子CC1は、プルアップ抵抗CR1によってプルアップされる結果、HIGHレベル(高電位)となる。 When the interchangeable lens 100 is not attached, the first terminal CC1 on the camera side is pulled up by the pull-up resistor CR1, and as a result, becomes a HIGH level (high potential).
 一方、交換レンズ100がカメラ10に装着されると、図9に示すように、カメラ側の第1の端子CC1には、交換レンズ側の第1の端子(レンズ検出端子)LC1が接続される。交換レンズ側の第1の端子LC1は、接地されているため、交換レンズ側の第1の端子LC1が、カメラ側の第1の端子CC1に接続されると、カメラ側の第1の端子CC1は、LOWレベル(低電位)となる。 On the other hand, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, as shown in FIG. 9, the first terminal CC1 on the interchangeable lens side (lens detection terminal) LC1 is connected to the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. . Since the first terminal LC1 on the interchangeable lens side is grounded, when the first terminal LC1 on the interchangeable lens side is connected to the first terminal CC1 on the camera side, the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. Becomes LOW level (low potential).
 カメラマイコン34は、カメラ側の第1の端子CC1に接続されたレンズ検出用ポートCP0の極性(HIGHレベル又はLOWレベル)に基づいて、交換レンズ100の装着の有無を検出する。すなわち、レンズ検出用ポートCP0の電位がHIGHレベルの場合は、交換レンズ100が装着されていない、と判定し、レンズ検出用ポートCP0の電位がLOWレベルの場合は、交換レンズ100が装着されている、と判別して、交換レンズ100の装着の有無を検出する。 The camera microcomputer 34 detects whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 is attached based on the polarity (HIGH level or LOW level) of the lens detection port CP0 connected to the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. That is, when the potential of the lens detection port CP0 is HIGH level, it is determined that the interchangeable lens 100 is not attached. When the potential of the lens detection port CP0 is LOW level, the interchangeable lens 100 is attached. It is determined that the interchangeable lens 100 is attached.
 なお、レンズ検出端子である第1の端子CC1は、交換レンズ100をカメラ10に装着する場合の交換レンズ100の回転方向Rの先頭に配置される。これにより、交換レンズ100を着脱する際、カメラ側の第1の端子CC1に交換レンズ側の第1の端子LC1以外の端子が接触するのを防止できる。これにより、誤検出を防止できる。 It should be noted that the first terminal CC1, which is a lens detection terminal, is arranged at the head in the rotation direction R of the interchangeable lens 100 when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10. Thereby, when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached or detached, it is possible to prevent the terminals other than the first terminal LC1 on the interchangeable lens side from coming into contact with the first terminal CC1 on the camera side. Thereby, erroneous detection can be prevented.
 《レンズマイコンの起動》
 カメラマイコン34は、交換レンズ100の装着を検出すると、電源供給部42にレンズ駆動用電源の供給を開始させる。すなわち、カメラ側の複数の電源端子(第2の端子CC2、第3の端子CC3及び第4の端子CC4)にレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3が供給されるように、電源供給部42及びレンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44を制御する。これにより、カメラ側の複数の電源端子(第2の端子CC2、第3の端子CC3及び第4の端子CC4)のそれぞれにレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3が供給される。
<Starting the lens microcomputer>
When the camera microcomputer 34 detects that the interchangeable lens 100 is attached, the camera microcomputer 34 causes the power supply unit 42 to start supplying the lens driving power. That is, the power supply unit 42 and the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) on the camera side. The lens driving power switch 44 is controlled. Accordingly, the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to the plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) on the camera side, respectively.
 また、カメラ側の複数の電源端子(第2の端子CC2、第3の端子CC3及び第4の端子CC4)にレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3が供給されると、そのカメラ側の複数の電源端子(第2の端子CC2、第3の端子CC3及び第4の端子CC4)に接続された交換レンズ側の複数の電源端子(第2の端子LC2、第3の端子LC3及び第4の端子LC4)を介して、交換レンズ100にレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3が供給される。 Further, when lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to a plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4) on the camera side, a plurality of camera side power supplies are supplied. A plurality of power supply terminals (second terminal LC2, third terminal LC3, and fourth terminal) on the interchangeable lens side connected to power supply terminals (second terminal CC2, third terminal CC3, and fourth terminal CC4). The lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to the interchangeable lens 100 via LC4).
 交換レンズ100にレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3が供給されると、そのうちの一つを使用して、レンズマイコン114のシステム電源が生成される。レンズマイコン114のシステム電源は、レンズ側システム電源生成部112で生成される。レンズ側システム電源生成部112は、カメラ側から供給された複数のレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3のうち最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1(+5V)を使用して、システム電源(+3.3V)を生成し、レンズマイコン114に供給する。 When the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 are supplied to the interchangeable lens 100, a system power supply for the lens microcomputer 114 is generated using one of them. The system power supply of the lens microcomputer 114 is generated by the lens side system power generation unit 112. The lens-side system power supply generation unit 112 uses the first lens drive power supply LV1 (+ 5V) having the lowest voltage among the plurality of lens drive power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 supplied from the camera side, and uses the system power supply. (+3.3 V) is generated and supplied to the lens microcomputer 114.
 システム電源がレンズマイコン114に正常に供給されることにより、レンズマイコン114が起動する。 When the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114, the lens microcomputer 114 is activated.
 《レンズマイコンにシステム電源が正常に供給されたことの検出》
 カメラマイコン34は、カメラ側端子群CCGの特定の端子の極性に基づいて、レンズマイコン114にシステム電源が正常に供給されたことを検出する。ここでの特定の端子とは、交換レンズ側において、プルアップ抵抗が接続された端子と接続される端子である。
<Detection of normal system power supply to the lens microcomputer>
The camera microcomputer 34 detects that the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114 based on the polarity of a specific terminal of the camera side terminal group CCG. The specific terminal here is a terminal connected to a terminal to which a pull-up resistor is connected on the interchangeable lens side.
 交換レンズ側において、プルアップ抵抗LR7、LR8、LR12が接続された端子は、第7の端子LC7、第8の端子LC8及び第12の端子LC12である。そして、これらの端子に接続されるカメラ側の端子は、第7の端子CC7、第8の端子CC8及び第12の端子CC12である。 On the interchangeable lens side, the terminals to which the pull-up resistors LR7, LR8, LR12 are connected are the seventh terminal LC7, the eighth terminal LC8, and the twelfth terminal LC12. The camera-side terminals connected to these terminals are the seventh terminal CC7, the eighth terminal CC8, and the twelfth terminal CC12.
 カメラマイコン34は、カメラ側端子群CCGの第7の端子CC7に接続される第1の通信用ポートCP1、カメラ側端子群CCGの第8の端子CC8に接続される第2の通信用ポートCP2、及び、カメラ側端子群CCGの第12の端子CC12に接続される第6の通信用ポートCP6の極性(HIGHレベル又はLOWレベル)を判別して、レンズマイコン114にシステム電源が正常に供給されたことを検出する。具体的には、第1の通信用ポートCP1、第2の通信用ポートCP2及び第6の通信用ポートCP6の極性がHIGHレベルであることを検出すると、レンズマイコン114にシステム電源が正常に供給された、と判定する。これにより、交換レンズ側でレンズマイコン114のシステム電源を生成する場合であっても、レンズマイコン114にシステム電源が正常に供給されたことをカメラ側で適切に検知できる。特に、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1のように、複数の端子の極性を判別することにより、より正確に検知できる。 The camera microcomputer 34 includes a first communication port CP1 connected to the seventh terminal CC7 of the camera side terminal group CCG, and a second communication port CP2 connected to the eighth terminal CC8 of the camera side terminal group CCG. And the polarity (HIGH level or LOW level) of the sixth communication port CP6 connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG is discriminated, and the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114. Detect that. Specifically, when it is detected that the polarities of the first communication port CP1, the second communication port CP2, and the sixth communication port CP6 are HIGH levels, the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114. It is determined that Thus, even when the system power supply of the lens microcomputer 114 is generated on the interchangeable lens side, it can be properly detected on the camera side that the system power supply is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114. In particular, as in the camera system 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to detect more accurately by determining the polarities of a plurality of terminals.
 なお、レンズマイコン114に正常にシステム電源が供給され、レンズマイコン114が正常に起動すると、レンズマイコン114は、第1の通信用ポートLP1の極性をLOWレベルに切り換える。この結果、交換レンズ側の第7の端子LC7及びカメラ側の第7の端子CC7の極性が、HIGHレベルからLOWレベルに切り換えられる。カメラマイコン34は、第7の端子CC7がLOWレベルに切り換えられたことを検出して、レンズマイコン114が起動したことを検出する。すなわち、レンズマイコン114は、第1の通信用ポートLP1の極性をLOWレベルに切り換えることにより、正常に起動したことをカメラマイコン34に通知する。レンズマイコン114は、起動から一定時間経過後に、第1の通信用ポートLP1の極性をLOWレベルに切り換える。 When the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer 114 and the lens microcomputer 114 starts up normally, the lens microcomputer 114 switches the polarity of the first communication port LP1 to the LOW level. As a result, the polarities of the seventh terminal LC7 on the interchangeable lens side and the seventh terminal CC7 on the camera side are switched from HIGH level to LOW level. The camera microcomputer 34 detects that the seventh terminal CC7 is switched to the LOW level, and detects that the lens microcomputer 114 is activated. That is, the lens microcomputer 114 notifies the camera microcomputer 34 that it has started normally by switching the polarity of the first communication port LP1 to the LOW level. The lens microcomputer 114 switches the polarity of the first communication port LP1 to the LOW level after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start.
 《交換レンズが正規品であるか否かの判別》
 カメラマイコン34は、カメラ側端子群CCGの特定の端子の極性に基づいて、装着された交換レンズ100が正規の交換レンズであるか否かを判別する。ここでの特定の端子とは、交換レンズ側において、プルアップ抵抗LR7、LR8、LR12が接続された端子と接続される端子、及び、プルダウン抵抗LR9が接続された端子である。
<Determination of whether or not the interchangeable lens is genuine>
The camera microcomputer 34 determines whether the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is a regular interchangeable lens based on the polarity of a specific terminal of the camera side terminal group CCG. The specific terminal here is a terminal connected to the terminal to which the pull-up resistors LR7, LR8, and LR12 are connected and a terminal to which the pull-down resistor LR9 is connected on the interchangeable lens side.
 交換レンズ側において、プルアップ抵抗LR7、LR8、LR12が接続された端子は、第7の端子LC7、第8の端子LC8及び第12の端子LC12である。そして、これらの端子に接続されるカメラ側の端子は、第7の端子CC7、第8の端子CC8及び第12の端子CC12である。 On the interchangeable lens side, the terminals to which the pull-up resistors LR7, LR8, LR12 are connected are the seventh terminal LC7, the eighth terminal LC8, and the twelfth terminal LC12. The camera-side terminals connected to these terminals are the seventh terminal CC7, the eighth terminal CC8, and the twelfth terminal CC12.
 また、交換レンズ側において、プルダウン抵抗LR9が接続された端子は、第9の端子LC9である。そして、この端子に接続されるカメラ側の端子は、第9の端子CC9である。 Also, on the interchangeable lens side, the terminal to which the pull-down resistor LR9 is connected is the ninth terminal LC9. The camera-side terminal connected to this terminal is a ninth terminal CC9.
 カメラマイコン34は、カメラ側端子群CCGの第7の端子CC7に接続される第1の通信用ポートCP1、カメラ側端子群CCGの第8の端子CC8に接続される第2の通信用ポートCP2、カメラ側端子群CCGの第9の端子CC9に接続される第3の通信用ポートCP3、及び、カメラ側端子群CCGの第12の端子CC12に接続される第6の通信用ポートCP6の極性(HIGHレベル又はLOWレベル)を判別して、装着された交換レンズ100が正規の交換レンズか否かを判別する。具体的には、第1の通信用ポートCP1、第2の通信用ポートCP2及び第6の通信用ポートCP6の極性がHIGHレベルであること、及び、第3の通信用ポートCP3の極性がLOWレベルであることを検出すると、装着された交換レンズ100が正規の交換レンズである、と判別する。 The camera microcomputer 34 includes a first communication port CP1 connected to the seventh terminal CC7 of the camera side terminal group CCG, and a second communication port CP2 connected to the eighth terminal CC8 of the camera side terminal group CCG. The polarities of the third communication port CP3 connected to the ninth terminal CC9 of the camera side terminal group CCG and the sixth communication port CP6 connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG (HIGH level or LOW level) is determined, and it is determined whether or not the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is a regular interchangeable lens. Specifically, the polarity of the first communication port CP1, the second communication port CP2, and the sixth communication port CP6 is HIGH, and the polarity of the third communication port CP3 is LOW. When the level is detected, it is determined that the attached interchangeable lens 100 is a regular interchangeable lens.
 このように、交換レンズ100の装着時に特定の端子の極性を判別することで、装着された交換レンズ100が正規の交換レンズか否かを容易に判別できる。 Thus, by determining the polarity of a specific terminal when the interchangeable lens 100 is mounted, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is a regular interchangeable lens.
 《互換性の判定》
 カメラ10に交換レンズ100が装着されると、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で互換性の有無が判定される。すなわち、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で相手先が特定の機能に対応しているか否かが判定される。上記のように、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1では、カメラ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子CC12)及びレンズ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子LC12)を使用して、交換レンズ100からカメラ10にレンズ情報を送信する機能が判定対象の機能とされ、当該機能への対応の有無が判定される。以下、この判定対象とされる特定の機能をレンズ情報取得機能と称する。判定は、次の手順で行われる。
<Compatibility determination>
When the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the camera 10, it is determined whether or not the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are compatible. That is, it is determined whether or not the other party supports a specific function in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. As described above, in the camera system 1 according to the present embodiment, the camera is connected from the interchangeable lens 100 to the camera using the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12). A function for transmitting lens information to 10 is set as a function to be determined, and whether or not the function is supported is determined. Hereinafter, the specific function to be determined is referred to as a lens information acquisition function. The determination is performed according to the following procedure.
 〈カメラ側での極性の設定〉
 カメラ側通信端子極性設定部70として機能するカメラマイコン34は、交換レンズ100に対してレンズ駆動用電源の供給を開始するタイミングで第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を設定する。
<Setting the polarity on the camera>
The camera microcomputer 34 functioning as the camera-side communication terminal polarity setting unit 70 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 at the timing when the supply of lens driving power to the interchangeable lens 100 is started.
 ここで、カメラマイコン34は、カメラ10がレンズ情報取得機能に対応している場合、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を第1極性であるHIGHレベルに設定する。一方、カメラ10がレンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合、カメラマイコン34は、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を第2極性であるLOWレベルに設定する。 Here, when the camera 10 is compatible with the lens information acquisition function, the camera microcomputer 34 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity. On the other hand, when the camera 10 does not support the lens information acquisition function, the camera microcomputer 34 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 to the LOW level that is the second polarity.
 第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定されることにより、カメラ側通信端子である第11の端子CC11がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定される。また、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定されることにより、第11の端子CC11がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定される。 When the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is set to HIGH level (first polarity), the eleventh terminal CC11 which is the camera side communication terminal is set to HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
 〈レンズ側での極性の設定〉
 レンズ側通信端子極性設定部130として機能するレンズマイコン114は、その起動のタイミングで第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を設定する。上記のように、レンズマイコン114は、正常に電源が供給されることにより起動するので、その起動のタイミングで第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を設定する。より具体的には、起動後であって、起動したことをカメラ側に通知する前に第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を設定する。
<Setting the polarity on the lens>
The lens microcomputer 114 functioning as the lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit 130 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 at the start timing. As described above, since the lens microcomputer 114 is activated when the power is normally supplied, the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is set at the activation timing. More specifically, the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is set after the activation but before notifying the camera side of the activation.
 ここで、レンズマイコン114は、交換レンズ100がレンズ情報取得機能に対応している場合、第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を第1極性であるHIGHレベルに設定する。一方、交換レンズ100がレンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合、レンズマイコン114は、第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を第2極性であるLOWレベルに設定する。 Here, when the interchangeable lens 100 is compatible with the lens information acquisition function, the lens microcomputer 114 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 to the HIGH level that is the first polarity. On the other hand, when the interchangeable lens 100 does not support the lens information acquisition function, the lens microcomputer 114 sets the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 to the LOW level that is the second polarity.
 第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定されることにより、レンズ側通信端子である第11の端子LC11がHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定される。また、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定されることにより、第11の端子LC11がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定される。 When the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is set to HIGH level (first polarity), the eleventh terminal LC11 that is the lens side communication terminal is set to HIGH level (first polarity). Further, when the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is set to the LOW level (second polarity), the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
 〈カメラ側での互換性の判定〉
 カメラ側判定部72として機能するカメラマイコン34は、レンズマイコン114が起動したことを検出したタイミングで第5の通信用ポートCP5(第11の端子CC11)の極性を検出し、互換性の有無を判定する。具体的には、第1の通信用ポートCP1がLOWレベルに切り換わったことを検出したタイミングで第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性を検出し、互換性の有無を判定する。
<Compatibility determination on the camera>
The camera microcomputer 34 functioning as the camera-side determination unit 72 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 (the eleventh terminal CC11) at the timing at which it is detected that the lens microcomputer 114 is activated, and determines whether there is compatibility. judge. Specifically, the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is detected at the timing when it is detected that the first communication port CP1 is switched to the LOW level, and the compatibility is determined.
 上記のように、第5の通信用ポートCP5は、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5がHIGHレベルに設定されている場合にのみHIGHレベルになる。そして、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5がHIGHレベルに設定される場合とは、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方でレンズ情報取得機能に対応している場合である。よって、カメラマイコン34は、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性がHIGHレベルの場合、装着された交換レンズ100がレンズ情報取得機能に対応している、と判定する。一方、第5の通信用ポートCP5の極性がLOWレベルの場合は、互換性なし、と判定する。なお、互換性なし、の場合とは、カメラ側がレンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合、交換レンズ側がレンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合、又は、カメラ側及び交換レンズ側の双方がレンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合である。 As described above, the fifth communication port CP5 becomes the HIGH level only when the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are set to the HIGH level in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. The case where the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are set to the HIGH level in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 means that both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 support the lens information acquisition function. It is. Therefore, the camera microcomputer 34 determines that the attached interchangeable lens 100 is compatible with the lens information acquisition function when the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is HIGH. On the other hand, when the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 is LOW level, it is determined that there is no compatibility. In the case of incompatibility, the camera side does not support the lens information acquisition function, the interchangeable lens side does not support the lens information acquisition function, or both the camera side and the interchangeable lens side are lenses. This is a case where the information acquisition function is not supported.
 〈交換レンズ側での互換性の判定〉
 レンズ側判定部132として機能するレンズマイコン114は、起動を通知するタイミングで第5の通信用ポートLP5(第11の端子LC11)の極性を検出し、互換性の有無を判定する。具体的には、第1の通信用ポートLP1をLOWレベルに切り換えるタイミングで第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性を検出し、互換性の有無を判定する。
<Compatibility determination on the interchangeable lens side>
The lens microcomputer 114 functioning as the lens-side determining unit 132 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 (the eleventh terminal LC11) at the timing of notifying activation and determines the compatibility. Specifically, the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is detected at the timing of switching the first communication port LP1 to the LOW level, and the compatibility is determined.
 カメラ側と同様に、交換レンズ側の第5の通信用ポートLP5は、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5がHIGHレベルに設定されている場合にのみHIGHレベルになる。上記のように、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5がHIGHレベルに設定される場合とは、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方でレンズ情報取得機能に対応している場合である。よって、レンズマイコン114は、第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性がHIGHレベルの場合、装着先のカメラ10がレンズ情報取得機能に対応している、と判定する。一方、第5の通信用ポートLP5の極性がLOWレベルの場合は、互換性なし、と判定する。なお、互換性なし、の場合とは、カメラ側がレンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合、交換レンズ側がレンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合、又は、カメラ側及び交換レンズ側の双方がレンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合である。 Similar to the camera side, the fifth communication port LP5 on the interchangeable lens side is at the HIGH level only when the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are set to the HIGH level in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. become. As described above, the case where the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are set to the HIGH level in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 corresponds to the lens information acquisition function in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. It is the case. Therefore, when the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is HIGH level, the lens microcomputer 114 determines that the mounting destination camera 10 is compatible with the lens information acquisition function. On the other hand, when the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 is LOW level, it is determined that there is no compatibility. In the case of incompatibility, the camera side does not support the lens information acquisition function, the interchangeable lens side does not support the lens information acquisition function, or both the camera side and the interchangeable lens side are lenses. This is a case where the information acquisition function is not supported.
 このように、カメラ側では第5の通信用ポートCP5(第11の端子CC11)、交換レンズ側では第5の通信用ポートLP5(第11の端子LC11)の極性を検出することにより、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で互換性の有無を判定できる。 As described above, the camera 10 detects the polarity of the fifth communication port CP5 (the eleventh terminal CC11) on the camera side and the polarity of the fifth communication port LP5 (the eleventh terminal LC11) on the interchangeable lens side. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the interchangeable lens 100 is compatible.
 〈判定例〉
 いま、カメラシステム1が、三つのカメラと、三つの交換レンズと、で構成されている場合を考える。三つのカメラを第1カメラ、第2カメラ及び第3カメラとし、三つの交換レンズを第1交換レンズ、第2交換レンズ及び第3交換レンズとする。カメラについては、第1カメラのみが特定の機能に対応しており、他は特定の機能に対応していないとする。また、交換レンズについては、第1交換レンズのみが特定の機能に対応しており、他は特定の機能に対応していないとする。
<Judgment example>
Consider a case where the camera system 1 is composed of three cameras and three interchangeable lenses. The three cameras are a first camera, a second camera, and a third camera, and the three interchangeable lenses are a first interchangeable lens, a second interchangeable lens, and a third interchangeable lens. As for the camera, only the first camera corresponds to a specific function, and the other does not correspond to a specific function. As for the interchangeable lens, only the first interchangeable lens corresponds to a specific function, and the other does not correspond to a specific function.
 この場合、第1カメラと第1交換レンズとを組み合わせた場合にのみ、第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5の極性がHIGHレベルになる。他の組み合わせ、すなわち、第1カメラと第2交換レンズ、第1カメラと第3交換レンズ、第2カメラと第1交換レンズ、第2カメラと第2交換レンズ、第2カメラと第3交換レンズ、第3カメラと第1交換レンズ、第3カメラと第2交換レンズ、及び、第3カメラと第3交換レンズとの組み合わせでは、すべて第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5の極性がLOWレベルになる。 In this case, the polarity of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 becomes HIGH level only when the first camera and the first interchangeable lens are combined. Other combinations, that is, the first camera and the second interchangeable lens, the first camera and the third interchangeable lens, the second camera and the first interchangeable lens, the second camera and the second interchangeable lens, the second camera and the third interchangeable lens In the combination of the third camera and the first interchangeable lens, the third camera and the second interchangeable lens, and the third camera and the third interchangeable lens, the polarities of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 are all set to the LOW level. Become.
 したがって、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方で第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5の極性を検出すれば、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で互換性の有無を判定できる。具体的には、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方で第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5の極性がHIGHレベルの場合、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方が特定の機能に対応していると判定できる。一方、カメラ及び交換レンズの双方で第5の通信用ポートCP5、LP5の極性がLOWレベルの場合、少なくとも一方が特定の機能に対応していないと判定できる。すなわち、互換性なし、と判定できる。 Therefore, if both the camera and the interchangeable lens detect the polarities of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5, it is possible to determine whether the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are compatible. Specifically, when the polarity of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 is HIGH in both the camera and the interchangeable lens, it can be determined that both the camera and the interchangeable lens are compatible with a specific function. On the other hand, when the polarity of the fifth communication ports CP5 and LP5 is LOW in both the camera and the interchangeable lens, it can be determined that at least one of them does not correspond to a specific function. That is, it can be determined that there is no compatibility.
 《レンズ情報の取得》
 カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方がレンズ情報取得機能に対応している場合、すなわち、双方で互換性がある場合、レンズ情報の取得処理が行われる。
<Lens information acquisition>
When both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are compatible with the lens information acquisition function, that is, when both are compatible, lens information acquisition processing is performed.
 レンズ情報の取得処理は、交換レンズ100からカメラ10にレンズ情報を送信し、これをカメラ10で受信することにより行われる。レンズ情報の送信は、単線式シリアル通信で行われ、カメラ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子CC12)及びレンズ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子LC12)を使用して行われる。 Lens information acquisition processing is performed by transmitting lens information from the interchangeable lens 100 to the camera 10 and receiving it by the camera 10. The transmission of the lens information is performed by single-wire serial communication, and is performed using the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12).
 ここで、レンズ情報とは、その交換レンズ100の仕様を示す情報である。レンズ情報には、たとえば、レンズ機種データ、レンズ特性データ、レンズ特性補正データ等が含まれる。レンズ機種データには、レンズ機種名、焦点距離、開放F値、メーカー名、プロダクトID(ID: Identification)等が含まれる。レンズ特性データには、輝度シェーディングデータ、色シェーディングデータ、ディストーションデータ、収差データ等が含まれる。レンズ特性補正データには、輝度シェーディング補正データ、色シェーディング補正データ、ディストーション補正データ、収差補正データ等が含まれる。レンズ情報は、レンズマイコン114のROMに格納される。 Here, the lens information is information indicating the specification of the interchangeable lens 100. The lens information includes, for example, lens model data, lens characteristic data, lens characteristic correction data, and the like. The lens model data includes the lens model name, focal length, open F value, manufacturer name, product ID (ID: Identification), and the like. The lens characteristic data includes luminance shading data, color shading data, distortion data, aberration data, and the like. The lens characteristic correction data includes luminance shading correction data, color shading correction data, distortion correction data, aberration correction data, and the like. The lens information is stored in the ROM of the lens microcomputer 114.
 レンズ情報の取得処理は、次の手順で行われる。 The lens information acquisition process is performed according to the following procedure.
 上記の互換性の判定において、装着先のカメラ10が、レンズ情報取得機能に対応していると判定すると、単線式シリアル通信を行うための通信設定が行われる。通信設定は、順番に実施され、カメラ側の通信設定が行われた後、交換レンズ側の通信設定が行われる。カメラ側の通信設定を交換レンズ側の通信設定よりも先に実施するのは、交換レンズが通信を開始する際に確実にカメラ側の通信設定を完了させておくためである。 In the above compatibility determination, if it is determined that the camera 10 as the mounting destination is compatible with the lens information acquisition function, communication settings for performing single-wire serial communication are performed. The communication settings are performed in order, and after the communication setting on the camera side is performed, the communication setting on the interchangeable lens side is performed. The communication setting on the camera side is performed before the communication setting on the interchangeable lens side in order to ensure that the communication setting on the camera side is completed when the interchangeable lens starts communication.
 通信設定が完了すると、レンズマイコン114は、第6の通信用ポートLP6(TXDポート)からレンズ情報を出力する。 When the communication setting is completed, the lens microcomputer 114 outputs lens information from the sixth communication port LP6 (TXD port).
 レンズマイコン114の第6の通信用ポートLP6から出力されたレンズ情報は、レンズ側拡張通信端子である第12の端子LC12を介して、カメラ側に送信される。 The lens information output from the sixth communication port LP6 of the lens microcomputer 114 is transmitted to the camera side via the twelfth terminal LC12 which is a lens side extended communication terminal.
 カメラ側に送信されたレンズ情報は、カメラ側拡張通信端子である第12の端子CC12を介して受信され、カメラマイコン34の第6の通信用ポートCP6(RXDポート)に入力される。これにより、カメラ側において、装着された交換レンズ100のレンズ情報が取得される。 The lens information transmitted to the camera side is received via the twelfth terminal CC12, which is a camera side extended communication terminal, and input to the sixth communication port CP6 (RXD port) of the camera microcomputer 34. Thereby, the lens information of the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is acquired on the camera side.
 取得されたレンズ情報は、交換レンズ100の制御等に利用される。 The acquired lens information is used for controlling the interchangeable lens 100 and the like.
 《通信設定》
 互換性有無の判定後、カメラ10と交換レンズ100の双方で通信設定が行われる。具体的には、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間で3線式シリアル通信を行うために必要な各種設定が行われる。
<Communication settings>
After determining compatibility, communication settings are performed in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. Specifically, various settings necessary for performing three-wire serial communication between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are performed.
 通信設定は、順番に実施され、交換レンズ側の通信設定が行われた後、カメラ側の通信設定が行われる。より具体的には、互換性有無の判定後、一定時間(たとえば、2.5ms)が経過すると、交換レンズ側の通信設定が行われ、更に一定時間(たとえば、2.5ms)が経過すると、カメラ側の通信設定が行われる。これにより、カメラが通信を開始する前に確実に通信の設定を完了させることができる。上記のように、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1は、カメラがSPIマスター、交換レンズがSPIスレーブとして3線式シリアル通信が行われる。したがって、通信を開始するトリガーは、カメラ側が有している。上記のように、交換レンズ側の通信設定をカメラ側の通信設定よりも先に実施することにより、カメラが通信を開始する前に確実に交換レンズ側の通信設定を完了させることができる。これにより、確実な通信を実現でき、かつ、通信開始までの時間も短縮できる。 The communication settings are performed in order, and after the communication settings on the interchangeable lens side are performed, the communication settings on the camera side are performed. More specifically, after a certain time (for example, 2.5 ms) has elapsed after the determination of compatibility, communication settings on the interchangeable lens side are performed, and when a certain time (for example, 2.5 ms) has elapsed, Communication settings on the camera side are performed. Thereby, the communication setting can be surely completed before the camera starts communication. As described above, the camera system 1 according to the present embodiment performs three-wire serial communication with the camera as the SPI master and the interchangeable lens as the SPI slave. Accordingly, the camera side has a trigger for starting communication. As described above, by performing the communication setting on the interchangeable lens side before the communication setting on the camera side, it is possible to reliably complete the communication setting on the interchangeable lens side before the camera starts communication. As a result, reliable communication can be realized and the time to start communication can be shortened.
 レンズマイコン114は、互換性有無の判定後、一定時間が経過すると、カメラマイコン34との間で3線式シリアル通信を行うために必要な各種設定を行う。更に一定時間が経過すると、カメラマイコン34が、レンズマイコン114との間で3線式シリアル通信を行うために必要な各種設定を行う。 The lens microcomputer 114 performs various settings necessary for performing three-wire serial communication with the camera microcomputer 34 after a predetermined time has elapsed after determining compatibility. When a predetermined time further elapses, the camera microcomputer 34 performs various settings necessary for performing three-wire serial communication with the lens microcomputer 114.
 この通信設定の処理は、上述したレンズ情報の取得処理と並行して行われる。これにより、起動を高速化できる。 This communication setting process is performed in parallel with the lens information acquisition process described above. Thereby, start-up can be speeded up.
 《カメラ側拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子の用途の切り換え》
 レンズ情報が取得された後、カメラ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子CC12)及びレンズ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子LC12)は、他の用途で使用される。具体的には、交換レンズ100の状態を交換レンズ100からカメラ10に通知するための端子として使用される。
<Switching the use of the camera side extended communication terminal and lens side extended communication terminal>
After the lens information is acquired, the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12) are used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state of the interchangeable lens 100 from the interchangeable lens 100.
 レンズ情報の送信が完了すると、レンズマイコン114は、レンズ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子LC12)を状態通知用の通信端子として使用するために必要な設定を行う。同様に、カメラマイコン34は、カメラ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子CC12)を状態通知用の通信端子として使用するために設定を行う。 When the transmission of the lens information is completed, the lens microcomputer 114 performs settings necessary for using the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12) as a communication terminal for status notification. Similarly, the camera microcomputer 34 performs setting in order to use the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) as a communication terminal for state notification.
 これにより、レンズ情報の送信後もカメラ側拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子を有効に活用できる。 This enables effective use of the camera side extended communication terminal and the lens side extended communication terminal even after transmission of lens information.
 なお、カメラ10又は交換レンズ100が、レンズ情報取得機能に対応していない場合も同様の処理が行われる。すなわち、交換レンズ100の状態を通知するための端子として使用するために必要な設定が行われる。 The same processing is performed when the camera 10 or the interchangeable lens 100 does not support the lens information acquisition function. That is, settings necessary for use as a terminal for notifying the state of the interchangeable lens 100 are performed.
 《交換レンズの駆動》
 カメラマイコン34とレンズマイコン114との間の通信が確立すると、交換レンズ100はスタンバイ状態となる。以後、カメラ10からの指示に応じて動作が可能になる。
<Drive of interchangeable lens>
When communication between the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 is established, the interchangeable lens 100 enters a standby state. Thereafter, the operation becomes possible in accordance with an instruction from the camera 10.
 レンズマイコン114は、同期式のシリアル通信用の端子を利用して、カメラマイコン34と通信し、カメラマイコン34から駆動の指示を受け付ける。そして、受け付けた指示に応じて、レンズ駆動部110を制御し、交換レンズ100を動作させる。 The lens microcomputer 114 communicates with the camera microcomputer 34 using a terminal for synchronous serial communication, and receives a drive instruction from the camera microcomputer 34. And according to the received instruction | indication, the lens drive part 110 is controlled and the interchangeable lens 100 is operated.
 この際、レンズ駆動部110は、カメラ10から電源の供給を受けて動作する。レンズ駆動用電源は、複数の電源端子(カメラ側の第2の端子CC2~第4の端子CC4及び交換レンズ側の第2の端子LC2~第4の端子LC4)を介して複数供給される。各レンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3は、互いに電圧が異なり、それぞれ対応する駆動部に供給される。たとえば、フォーカス駆動部110A、及び、絞り駆動部110Cを備えた交換レンズ100において、最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1(+5V)は絞り駆動部110Cに供給される。また、最も高い電圧の第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3(+10V)はフォーカス駆動部110Aに供給される。 At this time, the lens driving unit 110 operates by receiving power from the camera 10. A plurality of lens driving power sources are supplied via a plurality of power source terminals (second terminal CC2 to fourth terminal CC4 on the camera side and second terminal LC2 to fourth terminal LC4 on the interchangeable lens side). The lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 have different voltages from each other and are supplied to the corresponding driving units. For example, in the interchangeable lens 100 including the focus driving unit 110A and the aperture driving unit 110C, the first lens driving power supply LV1 (+ 5V) having the lowest voltage is supplied to the aperture driving unit 110C. The third lens driving power supply LV3 (+10 V) having the highest voltage is supplied to the focus driving unit 110A.
 このように各駆動部に対応する電圧の電源がカメラ側から供給されることにより、交換レンズ側で電源を生成する必要がなくなり、交換レンズ100の構成を簡素化できる。また、ノイズ対策も不要になるので、より構成を簡素化できる。 In this way, by supplying the power of the voltage corresponding to each driving unit from the camera side, it is not necessary to generate a power source on the interchangeable lens side, and the configuration of the interchangeable lens 100 can be simplified. Further, since noise countermeasures are not required, the configuration can be further simplified.
 更に、複数の電源端子を介して交換レンズに電源を供給することにより、効率よく電源を供給できる。たとえば、交換レンズ側で大きな電源が必要な場合、一つの電源端子から供給すると、端子部分での損失が大きくなる。しかし、複数の電源端子を介して交換レンズに供給する構成とすることにより、端子部分での損失を低減でき、効率よく電源を供給できる。すなわち、複数の電源端子を介して交換レンズに供給する構成とすることにより、端子面積を大きく取ることができ、損失を減らして、効率よく電源を供給できる。 Furthermore, power can be efficiently supplied by supplying power to the interchangeable lens through a plurality of power terminals. For example, when a large power supply is required on the interchangeable lens side, if the power is supplied from one power supply terminal, the loss at the terminal portion increases. However, by adopting a configuration in which the interchangeable lens is supplied via a plurality of power supply terminals, loss at the terminal portion can be reduced and power can be supplied efficiently. That is, by providing the interchangeable lens via a plurality of power supply terminals, the terminal area can be increased, and loss can be reduced and power can be supplied efficiently.
 その一方で電源端子の数が増えるが、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1では、システム電源用の端子を削減できるので、端子数の増加も抑制できる。 On the other hand, the number of power supply terminals increases, but in the camera system 1 of the present embodiment, the number of terminals for system power supply can be reduced, so that the increase in the number of terminals can also be suppressed.
 《レンズ駆動用電源の個別のオンオフ》
 上記のように、交換レンズ100には、カメラ10から電圧の異なる複数のレンズ駆動用電源が供給される。
<Individual ON / OFF of lens drive power supply>
As described above, the interchangeable lens 100 is supplied with a plurality of lens driving power sources having different voltages from the camera 10.
 しかし、交換レンズ100によっては、必ずしもすべてのレンズ駆動用電源が使用されるとは限らず、一部のレンズ駆動用電源のみが使用される場合もある。たとえば、各駆動部が同じ動作電圧で動作する場合などには、その動作電圧以外のレンズ駆動用電源は使用されない。 However, depending on the interchangeable lens 100, not all lens driving power sources are necessarily used, and only some lens driving power sources may be used. For example, when each driving unit operates at the same operating voltage, a lens driving power supply other than the operating voltage is not used.
 そこで、交換レンズ側で使用しない電圧のレンズ駆動用電源は供給を停止する。これにより、省電力化が図れる。 Therefore, the power for driving the lens that is not used on the interchangeable lens side is stopped. Thereby, power saving can be achieved.
 どの電圧のレンズ駆動用電源が必要かは、交換レンズごとに異なる。カメラマイコン34は、交換レンズ100から取得したレンズ情報に基づいて、必要な電圧のレンズ駆動用電源を判別し、電源供給部42から必要な電圧のレンズ駆動用電源のみを供給させる。具体的には、次のように処理する。 The voltage driving power required for the lens varies depending on the interchangeable lens. Based on the lens information acquired from the interchangeable lens 100, the camera microcomputer 34 determines a lens driving power source having a necessary voltage and causes the power supply unit 42 to supply only a lens driving power source having a necessary voltage. Specifically, the process is as follows.
 まず、交換レンズ100から取得したレンズ情報に基づいて、装着された交換レンズ100に必要な電圧のレンズ駆動用電源を判別する。カメラマイコン34に備えられたROMには、判定テーブルが格納されており、カメラマイコン34は、その判定テーブルを参照して、装着された交換レンズ100に必要な電圧のレンズ駆動用電源を判別する。判定テーブルには、カメラシステム1を構成する交換レンズ(レンズ機種名)ごとに、必要な電圧のレンズ駆動用電源の情報が対応付けられて記録される。 First, based on the lens information acquired from the interchangeable lens 100, a lens driving power source having a voltage necessary for the mounted interchangeable lens 100 is determined. The ROM provided in the camera microcomputer 34 stores a determination table. The camera microcomputer 34 refers to the determination table to determine the lens driving power source having a voltage required for the mounted interchangeable lens 100. . In the determination table, information about a lens driving power source having a necessary voltage is recorded in association with each interchangeable lens (lens model name) constituting the camera system 1.
 次に、カメラマイコン34は、判別結果に基づいて、レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部44を制御し、交換レンズ側で未使用のレンズ駆動用電源の供給を停止する。たとえば、中間の電圧である第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2が交換レンズ側で未使用の場合、第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2の供給を停止させる。これにより、必要なレンズ駆動用電源のみが供給される。 Next, the camera microcomputer 34 controls the lens driving power switch unit 44 based on the determination result, and stops the supply of unused lens driving power on the interchangeable lens side. For example, when the second lens driving power source LV2 that is an intermediate voltage is unused on the interchangeable lens side, the supply of the second lens driving power source LV2 is stopped. As a result, only necessary lens driving power is supplied.
 なお、最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1は、レンズマイコン114のシステム電源に使用する関係上、必ず使用されるレンズ駆動用電源となる。したがって、実際に供給が停止されるのは、中間の電圧である第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2又は最も高い電圧の第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3となる。 Note that the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage is a lens driving power supply that is always used because it is used as the system power supply of the lens microcomputer 114. Accordingly, the supply is actually stopped for the second lens driving power supply LV2 which is an intermediate voltage or the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage.
 このように、交換レンズ側で未使用のレンズ駆動用電源の供給を停止することにより、効率よく電源を供給でき、かつ、省電力化が図れる。 Thus, by stopping the supply of unused lens driving power on the interchangeable lens side, power can be supplied efficiently and power saving can be achieved.
 なお、本例では、カメラ側に備えられた判定テーブルを参照して、必要な電圧のレンズ駆動用電源を判別する構成としているが、交換レンズから送信するレンズ情報に必要な電圧のレンズ駆動用電源を含めてもよい。 In this example, the lens driving power source having the necessary voltage is determined with reference to the determination table provided on the camera side. However, the lens driving power having the necessary voltage for the lens information transmitted from the interchangeable lens is used. A power supply may be included.
 《交換レンズの取り外し》
 交換レンズ100をカメラ10から取り外す場合は、交換レンズ100を取り付けたときとは逆の方向に交換レンズ100を回転させて、カメラ10から取り外す。この際、交換レンズ100の電源端子(第2の端子LC2、第3の端子LC3及び第4の端子LC4)が、交換レンズ100のグランド端子(第5の端子LC5及び第6の端子LC6)に対して、回転方向の後側(交換レンズ100を装着するときの回転方向Rに対しては前側)に配置されていることにより、交換レンズ100を安全に取り外すことができる。
<Removing the interchangeable lens>
When the interchangeable lens 100 is removed from the camera 10, the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated in the direction opposite to that when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached and is detached from the camera 10. At this time, the power supply terminals (second terminal LC2, third terminal LC3 and fourth terminal LC4) of the interchangeable lens 100 are connected to the ground terminals (fifth terminal LC5 and sixth terminal LC6) of the interchangeable lens 100. On the other hand, the replacement lens 100 can be safely removed by being arranged on the rear side in the rotation direction (the front side with respect to the rotation direction R when the interchangeable lens 100 is mounted).
 すなわち、交換レンズ100を取り外すときの回転方向に対して、電源端子がグランド端子の後側に隣接して配置されていることにより、交換レンズ100を取り外す方向に回転させると、直後に交換レンズ100の電源端子がカメラ10のグランド端子に接触する構造となる。すなわち、他の端子に触れることなく、交換レンズ100の電源端子がカメラ10のグランド端子に接触する構造となる。これにより、電源端子及びその配線に残存する電荷を適切に処理でき、安全に交換レンズ100を取り外すことができる。 That is, since the power supply terminal is disposed adjacent to the rear side of the ground terminal with respect to the rotation direction when the interchangeable lens 100 is removed, when the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated in the removal direction, the interchangeable lens 100 is immediately after. The power supply terminal is in contact with the ground terminal of the camera 10. That is, the power supply terminal of the interchangeable lens 100 is in contact with the ground terminal of the camera 10 without touching other terminals. Thereby, the charge remaining on the power supply terminal and its wiring can be appropriately processed, and the interchangeable lens 100 can be safely removed.
 また、複数の電源端子が、交換レンズ100を取り外すときの回転方向に対して、電圧の高い順(交換レンズ100を装着するときの回転方向Rに対しては低い順)に配置されていることにより、電源端子同士が接触しても、適切に交換レンズ側に残存する電荷を処理できる。すなわち、交換レンズ100を取り外すために回転させると、交換レンズ側の電源端子は、必ず自身よりも高い電圧の電源を供給するカメラ側の電源端子又はグランド端子に接触する構造になるので、交換レンズ側の電源端子及びその配線に電荷が残存していても、適切に処理できる。これにより、安全に交換レンズ100を取り外すことができる。 In addition, the plurality of power terminals are arranged in order of increasing voltage with respect to the rotation direction when the interchangeable lens 100 is removed (in order of decreasing voltage relative to the rotation direction R when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached). Thus, even if the power supply terminals are in contact with each other, the charge remaining on the interchangeable lens side can be appropriately processed. That is, when the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated to remove, the interchangeable lens-side power terminal always comes into contact with the camera-side power supply terminal or ground terminal that supplies power having a higher voltage than itself. Even if electric charges remain in the power supply terminal and its wiring on the side, it can be appropriately processed. Thereby, the interchangeable lens 100 can be removed safely.
 ◆◆第2の実施の形態◆◆
 [カメラシステムの構成]
 図12は、レンズ交換式のカメラシステムの第2の実施の形態のシステム構成図である。
◆◆ Second embodiment ◆◆
[Camera system configuration]
FIG. 12 is a system configuration diagram of a second embodiment of the interchangeable lens camera system.
 同図に示すように、本実施の形態のカメラシステム1は、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間に着脱自在に装着されるアクセサリー200を更に備える。アクセサリー200は、少なくとも一つ備えられる。本実施の形態では、二つのアクセサリー200が備えられる。アクセサリー200は、たとえば、エクステンダー、エクステンションチューブ等で構成される。本実施の形態では、二つのアクセサリー200が共にエクステンダーで構成される。この場合、アクセサリー200には、その鏡胴内にエクステンダーレンズが備えられる。二つのアクセサリー200のうち一方は焦点距離を1.4倍に伸ばすエクステンダーで構成され、他方は焦点距離を2倍に伸ばすエクステンダーで構成される。 As shown in the figure, the camera system 1 according to the present embodiment further includes an accessory 200 that is detachably mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. At least one accessory 200 is provided. In the present embodiment, two accessories 200 are provided. The accessory 200 is composed of, for example, an extender and an extension tube. In the present embodiment, the two accessories 200 are both constituted by extenders. In this case, the accessory 200 is provided with an extender lens in its lens barrel. One of the two accessories 200 is configured by an extender that extends the focal length by 1.4 times, and the other is configured by an extender that extends the focal length by two times.
 本実施の形態のカメラシステム1では、特定の機能への対応の有無として、アクセサリー200と通信する機能への対応の有無が判定される。すなわち、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100には、アクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えたものが存在し、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方で当該機能への対応の有無が判定される。 In the camera system 1 of the present embodiment, the presence / absence of correspondence to a function communicating with the accessory 200 is determined as the presence / absence of correspondence to a specific function. That is, some cameras 10 and interchangeable lenses 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200, and both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 determine whether or not the functions are supported.
 《アクセサリーの外観構成》
 アクセサリー200は、そのアクセサリーボディー202の基端側にアクセサリー側第1マウント204Aを備え、先端側にアクセサリー側第2マウント204Bを備える。
<< Appearance structure of accessories >>
The accessory 200 includes an accessory-side first mount 204A on the proximal end side of the accessory body 202, and an accessory-side second mount 204B on the distal end side.
 アクセサリー側第1マウント204Aは、アクセサリー200をカメラ10に装着するためのマウントである。アクセサリー側第1マウント204Aは、交換レンズ100に備えられるレンズ側マウント104と同じ構造を有する。 The accessory side first mount 204 </ b> A is a mount for mounting the accessory 200 to the camera 10. The accessory-side first mount 204 </ b> A has the same structure as the lens-side mount 104 provided in the interchangeable lens 100.
 アクセサリー側第2マウント204Bは、アクセサリー200に交換レンズ100を装着するためのマウントである。アクセサリー側第2マウント204Bは、カメラ10に備えられるカメラ側マウント14と同じ構造を有する。 The accessory side second mount 204 </ b> B is a mount for mounting the interchangeable lens 100 on the accessory 200. The accessory-side second mount 204 </ b> B has the same structure as the camera-side mount 14 provided in the camera 10.
 アクセサリー200は、アクセサリー側第1マウント204Aを介してカメラ10に装着される。アクセサリー200が装着されたカメラ10は、アクセサリー200のアクセサリー側第2マウント204Bに交換レンズ100が装着される。 The accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10 via the accessory-side first mount 204A. In the camera 10 to which the accessory 200 is attached, the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the accessory-side second mount 204B of the accessory 200.
 《アクセサリーの電気的構成》
 図13は、アクセサリーの電気的な構成を示す図である。
<Electrical configuration of accessories>
FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the accessory.
 〈アクセサリー側第1端子群及びアクセサリー側第2端子群〉
 (A)アクセサリー側第1端子群
 アクセサリー200のアクセサリー側第1マウント204Aには、複数の端子A1C1~A1C12で構成されるアクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGが備えられる。アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGは、カメラ側端子群CCGに対応して設けられる。したがって、カメラ側端子群CCGを構成する端子と同じ数の端子で構成され、かつ、各端子A1C1~A1C12は、カメラ側端子群CCGを構成する端子CC1~CC12と同じ間隔で配置される。
<Accessory side first terminal group and accessory side second terminal group>
(A) Accessory-side first terminal group The accessory-side first mount 204A of the accessory 200 includes an accessory-side first terminal group A1CG including a plurality of terminals A1C1 to A1C12. The accessory-side first terminal group A1CG is provided corresponding to the camera-side terminal group CCG. Therefore, it is configured with the same number of terminals as the terminals constituting the camera side terminal group CCG, and the terminals A1C1 to A1C12 are arranged at the same intervals as the terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the camera side terminal group CCG.
 アクセサリー200をカメラ10に装着すると、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの各端子A1C1~A1C12が、カメラ側端子群CCGの対応する端子CC1~CC12に接続される。すなわち、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第1の端子A1C1がカメラ側端子群CCGの第1の端子CC1に接続され、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第2の端子A1C2がカメラ側端子群CCGの第2の端子CC2に接続され、…、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12がカメラ側端子群CCGの第12の端子CC12に接続される。 When the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10, the terminals A1C1 to A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG are connected to the corresponding terminals CC1 to CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG. That is, the first terminal A1C1 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG is connected to the first terminal CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG, and the second terminal A1C2 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG is the camera side terminal group CCG. The twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG is connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG.
 カメラ側端子群CCGの第1の端子CC1は、レンズ検出端子を構成するので、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第1の端子A1C1もレンズ検出端子を構成する。 Since the first terminal CC1 of the camera side terminal group CCG constitutes a lens detection terminal, the first terminal A1C1 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG also constitutes a lens detection terminal.
 また、カメラ側端子群CCGの第2の端子CC2、第3の端子CC3及び第4の端子CC4は、それぞれ電源端子を構成するので、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第2の端子A1C2、第3の端子A1C3及び第4の端子A1C4もそれぞれ対応する電源端子を構成する。 Further, since the second terminal CC2, the third terminal CC3, and the fourth terminal CC4 of the camera side terminal group CCG constitute a power supply terminal, respectively, the second terminal A1C2, the second terminal A1C2, and the second terminal A1CG of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG. The third terminal A1C3 and the fourth terminal A1C4 also constitute corresponding power supply terminals.
 なお、第2の端子A1C2が、最も低い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV1を供給する端子であり、第4の端子A1C4が、最も高い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV3を供給する端子である。また、第3の端子A1C3が、中間の電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV2を供給する端子である。 The second terminal A1C2 is a terminal that supplies the lowest voltage lens driving power source LV1, and the fourth terminal A1C4 is a terminal that supplies the highest voltage lens driving power source LV3. The third terminal A1C3 is a terminal that supplies the lens driving power supply LV2 having an intermediate voltage.
 また、カメラ側端子群CCGの第5の端子CC5及び第6の端子CC6は、それぞれグランド端子を構成するので、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第5の端子A1C5及び第6の端子A1C6もそれぞれ対応するグランド端子を構成する。 In addition, since the fifth terminal CC5 and the sixth terminal CC6 of the camera side terminal group CCG constitute a ground terminal, respectively, the fifth terminal A1C5 and the sixth terminal A1C6 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG also respectively. Configure the corresponding ground terminal.
 更に、カメラ側端子群CCGの第7の端子CC7~第12の端子CC12は、それぞれ通信端子を構成するので、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第7の端子A1C7~第12の端子A1C12もそれぞれ対応する通信端子を構成する。特に、第12の端子A1C12は、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を構成する。第12の端子A1C12は、アクセサリー200がカメラ10に装着された際、カメラ側拡張通信端子であるカメラ10の第12の端子CC12に接続される。 Further, since the seventh terminal CC7 to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG constitute a communication terminal, respectively, the seventh terminal A1C7 to the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG are also respectively provided. Configure the corresponding communication terminal. In particular, the twelfth terminal A1C12 constitutes an accessory-side first extended communication terminal. The twelfth terminal A1C12 is connected to the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 which is a camera side extended communication terminal when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10.
 (B)アクセサリー側第2端子群
 アクセサリー200のアクセサリー側第2マウント204Bには、複数の端子A2C1~A2C12で構成されるアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGが備えられる。アクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGは、レンズ側端子群LCGに対応して設けられる。したがって、レンズ側端子群LCGを構成する端子と同じ数の端子で構成され、かつ、各端子A2C1~A2C12は、レンズ側端子群LCGを構成する端子CC1~CC12と同じ間隔で配置される。
(B) Accessory-side second terminal group The accessory-side second mount 204B of the accessory 200 includes an accessory-side second terminal group A2CG including a plurality of terminals A2C1 to A2C12. The accessory-side second terminal group A2CG is provided corresponding to the lens-side terminal group LCG. Accordingly, it is configured with the same number of terminals as the terminals constituting the lens side terminal group LCG, and the terminals A2C1 to A2C12 are arranged at the same intervals as the terminals CC1 to CC12 constituting the lens side terminal group LCG.
 交換レンズ100をアクセサリー200に装着すると、レンズ側端子群LCGの各端子LC1~LC12が、アクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの対応する端子A2C1~A2C12に接続される。すなわち、レンズ側端子群LCGの第1の端子LC1がアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第1の端子A2C1に接続され、レンズ側端子群LCGの第2の端子LC2がアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第2の端子A2C2に接続され、…、レンズ側端子群LCGの第12の端子LC12がアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第12の端子A2C12に接続される。 When the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the accessory 200, the terminals LC1 to LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG are connected to the corresponding terminals A2C1 to A2C12 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG. That is, the first terminal LC1 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the first terminal A2C1 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG, and the second terminal LC2 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the accessory side second terminal group A2CG. The twelfth terminal LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG is connected to the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG.
 レンズ側端子群LCGの第1の端子LC1は、レンズ検出端子を構成するので、アクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第1の端子A2C1もレンズ検出端子を構成する。 Since the first terminal LC1 of the lens side terminal group LCG constitutes a lens detection terminal, the first terminal A2C1 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG also constitutes a lens detection terminal.
 また、レンズ側端子群LCGの第2の端子LC2、第3の端子LC3及び第4の端子LC4は、それぞれ電源端子を構成するので、アクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第2の端子A2C2、第3の端子A2C3及び第4の端子A2C4もそれぞれ対応する電源端子を構成する。 Further, since the second terminal LC2, the third terminal LC3, and the fourth terminal LC4 of the lens side terminal group LCG constitute a power terminal, respectively, the second terminal A2C2, the second terminal A2C2, and the second terminal A2CG of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG. The third terminal A2C3 and the fourth terminal A2C4 also constitute corresponding power supply terminals.
 なお、第2の端子A2C2が、最も低い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV1を供給する端子であり、第4の端子A2C4が、最も高い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV3を供給する端子である。また、第3の端子A2C3が、中間の電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV2を供給する端子である。 The second terminal A2C2 is a terminal that supplies the lowest voltage lens driving power supply LV1, and the fourth terminal A2C4 is a terminal that supplies the highest voltage lens driving power supply LV3. The third terminal A2C3 is a terminal that supplies a lens driving power supply LV2 having an intermediate voltage.
 また、レンズ側端子群LCGの第5の端子LC5及び第6の端子LC6は、それぞれグランド端子を構成するので、アクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第5の端子A2C5及び第6の端子A2C6もそれぞれ対応するグランド端子を構成する。 Further, since the fifth terminal LC5 and the sixth terminal LC6 of the lens side terminal group LCG constitute a ground terminal, respectively, the fifth terminal A2C5 and the sixth terminal A2C6 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG also respectively. Configure the corresponding ground terminal.
 更に、レンズ側端子群LCGの第7の端子LC7~第12の端子LC12は、それぞれ通信端子を構成するので、アクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第7の端子A2C7~第12の端子A2C12もそれぞれ対応する通信端子を構成する。特に、第12の端子A2C12は、アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を構成する。第12の端子A2C12は、交換レンズ100が装着された際、レンズ側拡張通信端子である交換レンズ100の第12の端子LC12に接続される。 Further, since the seventh terminal LC7 to the twelfth terminal LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG respectively constitute communication terminals, the seventh terminal A2C7 to the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG are also respectively provided. Configure the corresponding communication terminal. In particular, the twelfth terminal A2C12 constitutes an accessory-side second extended communication terminal. The twelfth terminal A2C12 is connected to the twelfth terminal LC12 of the interchangeable lens 100 which is a lens side extended communication terminal when the interchangeable lens 100 is attached.
 〈アクセサリー側第1端子群とアクセサリー側第2端子群との関係〉
 (A)第1の端子
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいてレンズ検出端子を構成する第1の端子A1C1及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいてレンズ検出端子を構成する第1の端子A2C1は、アクセサリー内において、第1の接続配線AL1によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第1の端子CC1と交換レンズ100の第1の端子LC1とを電気的に接続できる。
<Relationship between accessory side first terminal group and accessory side second terminal group>
(A) 1st terminal 1st terminal A1C1 which comprises a lens detection terminal in accessory side 1st terminal group A1CG and 1st terminal A2C1 which comprises a lens detection terminal in accessory side 2nd terminal group A2CG are in accessories. Are connected to each other by the first connection wiring AL1. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the first terminal CC1 of the camera 10 and the first terminal LC1 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
 (B)第2の端子~第4の端子
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて第1の電源端子を構成する第2の端子A1C2及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて第1の電源端子を構成する第2の端子A2C2は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側電源線を構成する第2の接続配線AL2によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第2の端子CC2と交換レンズ100の第2の端子LC2とを電気的に接続できる。この場合、第2の接続配線AL2は、カメラ10から交換レンズ100に最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1を供給する配線として機能する。
(B) Second terminal to fourth terminal The first power supply terminal is configured in the second terminal A1C2 and the accessory second terminal group A2CG that configure the first power supply terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG. The second terminals A2C2 are connected to each other by the second connection wiring AL2 constituting the accessory-side power line in the accessory. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the second terminal CC2 of the camera 10 and the second terminal LC2 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected. In this case, the second connection wiring AL2 functions as a wiring for supplying the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて第2の電源端子を構成する第3の端子A1C3及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて第2の電源端子を構成する第3の端子A2C3は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側電源線を構成する第3の接続配線AL3によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第3の端子CC3と交換レンズ100の第3の端子LC3とを電気的に接続できる。この場合、第3の接続配線AL3は、カメラ10から交換レンズ100に中間の電圧の第2のレンズ駆動用電源LV2を供給する配線として機能する。 The third terminal A1C3 constituting the second power supply terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the third terminal A2C3 constituting the second power supply terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG are accessories. They are connected to each other by the third connection wiring AL3 constituting the side power supply line. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the third terminal CC3 of the camera 10 and the third terminal LC3 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected. In this case, the third connection wiring AL3 functions as a wiring for supplying the second lens driving power supply LV2 having an intermediate voltage from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて第3の電源端子を構成する第4の端子A1C4及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて第3の電源端子を構成する第4の端子A2C4は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側電源線を構成する第4の接続配線AL4によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第4の端子CC4と交換レンズ100の第4の端子LC4とを電気的に接続できる。この場合、第4の接続配線AL4は、カメラ10から交換レンズ100に最も高い電圧の第3のレンズ駆動用電源LV3を供給する配線として機能する。 The fourth terminal A1C4 constituting the third power supply terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the fourth terminal A2C4 constituting the third power supply terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG are accessories. They are connected to each other by a fourth connection wiring AL4 constituting the side power supply line. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the fourth terminal CC4 of the camera 10 and the fourth terminal LC4 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected. In this case, the fourth connection wiring AL4 functions as a wiring for supplying the third lens driving power supply LV3 having the highest voltage from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
 (C)第5の端子及び第6の端子
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて第2のグランド端子を構成する第6の端子A1C6及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて第2のグランド端子を構成する第6の端子A2C6は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側グランド線を構成する第6の接続配線AL6によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第6の端子CC6と交換レンズ100の第6の端子LC6とを電気的に接続できる。
(C) 5th terminal and 6th terminal A 2nd ground terminal is comprised in 6th terminal A1C6 and 2nd accessory side 2nd terminal group A2CG which comprise a 2nd ground terminal in accessory side 1st terminal group A1CG. The sixth terminals A2C6 are connected to each other by a sixth connection wiring AL6 constituting an accessory-side ground line in the accessory. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the sixth terminal CC6 of the camera 10 and the sixth terminal LC6 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて第1のグランド端子を構成する第5の端子A1C5及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて第1のグランド端子を構成する第5の端子A2C5は、アクセサリー内において、それぞれ第5の接続配線AL5A、AL5Bを介して第6の接続配線AL6に接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第5の端子CC5と交換レンズ100の第5の端子LC5とを電気的に接続できる。 In the accessory side first terminal group A1CG, the fifth terminal A1C5 constituting the first ground terminal and the fifth terminal A2C5 constituting the first ground terminal in the accessory side second terminal group A2CG are respectively in the accessory. The fifth connection wiring AL5A and AL5B are connected to the sixth connection wiring AL6. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the fifth terminal CC5 of the camera 10 and the fifth terminal LC5 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
 (D)第7の端子~第12の端子
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第7の端子A1C7及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第7の端子A2C7は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側通信線を構成する第7の接続配線AL7によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第7の端子CC7と交換レンズ100の第7の端子LC7とを電気的に接続できる。
(D) Seventh terminal to twelfth terminal The seventh terminal A1C7 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory side first terminal group A1CG and the seventh terminal A2C7 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory side second terminal group A2CG are: In the accessory, they are connected to each other by the seventh connection wiring AL7 constituting the accessory-side communication line. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the seventh terminal CC7 of the camera 10 and the seventh terminal LC7 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第8の端子A1C8及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第8の端子A2C8は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側通信線を構成する第8の接続配線AL8によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第8の端子CC8と交換レンズ100の第8の端子LC8とを電気的に接続できる。 The eighth terminal A1C8 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the eighth terminal A2C8 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG constitute the accessory-side communication line in the accessory. They are connected to each other by the eighth connection wiring AL8. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the eighth terminal CC8 of the camera 10 and the eighth terminal LC8 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第9の端子A1C9及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第9の端子A2C9は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側通信線を構成する第9の接続配線AL9によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第9の端子CC9と交換レンズ100の第9の端子LC9とを電気的に接続できる。 The ninth terminal A1C9 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the ninth terminal A2C9 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG constitute the accessory-side communication line in the accessory. They are connected to each other by a ninth connection wiring AL9. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the ninth terminal CC9 of the camera 10 and the ninth terminal LC9 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第10の端子A1C10及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第10の端子A2C10は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側通信線を構成する第10の接続配線AL10によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第10の端子CC10と交換レンズ100の第10の端子LC10とを電気的に接続できる。 The tenth terminal A1C10 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the tenth terminal A2C10 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG constitute the accessory-side communication line in the accessory. They are connected to each other by a tenth connection wiring AL10. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the tenth terminal CC10 of the camera 10 and the tenth terminal LC10 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第11の端子A1C11及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいて通信端子を構成する第11の端子A2C11は、アクセサリー内において、アクセサリー側通信線を構成する第11の接続配線AL11によって互いに接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間にアクセサリー200を装着した場合であっても、カメラ10の第11の端子CC11と交換レンズ100の第11の端子CC11とを電気的に接続できる。 The eleventh terminal A1C11 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the eleventh terminal A2C11 constituting the communication terminal in the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG constitute the accessory-side communication line in the accessory. They are connected to each other by an eleventh connection wiring AL11. Thereby, even when the accessory 200 is mounted between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100, the eleventh terminal CC11 of the camera 10 and the eleventh terminal CC11 of the interchangeable lens 100 can be electrically connected.
 ここで、第9の端子、第10の端子及び第11の端子は、3線式シリアル通信に使用される端子なので、第9の接続配線AL9、第10の接続配線AL10及び第11の接続配線AL11は、3線式シリアル通信に使用される。 Here, since the ninth terminal, the tenth terminal, and the eleventh terminal are terminals used for three-wire serial communication, the ninth connection wiring AL9, the tenth connection wiring AL10, and the eleventh connection wiring are used. AL11 is used for 3-wire serial communication.
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGにおいてアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を構成する第12の端子A1C12及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGにおいてアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を構成する第12の端子A2C12は、アクセサリー内において、それぞれ第12の接続配線AL12A、AL12Bを介して、アクセサリーマイコン210に接続される。 In the accessory side first terminal group A1CG, the twelfth terminal A1C12 constituting the accessory side first extended communication terminal and the twelfth terminal A2C12 constituting the accessory side second extended communication terminal in the accessory side second terminal group A2CG are accessories. Are connected to the accessory microcomputer 210 via the twelfth connection wirings AL12A and AL12B, respectively.
 〈アクセサリーマイコン〉
 アクセサリーマイコン210は、アクセサリー200の動作を制御する。
<Accessory microcomputer>
The accessory microcomputer 210 controls the operation of the accessory 200.
 アクセサリーマイコン210は、CPU、ROM、及び、RAMを備え、規定のプログラムを実行することにより各種機能を提供する。ROMには、CPUが実行する各種プログラムの他、制御に必要な各種データ等が格納される。 The accessory microcomputer 210 includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and provides various functions by executing a prescribed program. In addition to various programs executed by the CPU, various data necessary for control are stored in the ROM.
 図14は、アクセサリーマイコンが実現する機能の一例を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an example of functions realized by the accessory microcomputer.
 同図に示すように、アクセサリーマイコン210は、規定のプログラムを実行することにより、アクセサリー通信部212、バイパス制御部214等として機能する。 As shown in the figure, the accessory microcomputer 210 functions as an accessory communication unit 212, a bypass control unit 214, and the like by executing a prescribed program.
 アクセサリー通信部212は、アクセサリー200が装着されたカメラ10及び交換レンズ100と通信する。通信は、アクセサリーマイコン入出力ポート216を介して行われる。アクセサリーマイコン入出力ポート216には、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100との間で単線式シリアルを行うための第1のポートAP1及び第2のポートAP2を備える。第1のポートAP1は、データを出力するTXDポートとして機能する。第1のポートAP1は、第12の接続配線AL12Aを介して、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12に接続される(図13参照)。第2のポートAP2は、データを受信するRXDポートとして機能する。第2のポートAP2は、第12の接続配線AL12Bを介して、アクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第12の端子A2C12に接続される(図13参照)。 The accessory communication unit 212 communicates with the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 to which the accessory 200 is attached. Communication is performed via the accessory microcomputer input / output port 216. The accessory microcomputer input / output port 216 includes a first port AP1 and a second port AP2 for performing single-line serial communication between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100. The first port AP1 functions as a TXD port that outputs data. The first port AP1 is connected to the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG via the twelfth connection wiring AL12A (see FIG. 13). The second port AP2 functions as an RXD port that receives data. The second port AP2 is connected to the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG via the twelfth connection wiring AL12B (see FIG. 13).
 これにより、カメラ側端子群CCGの第12の端子CC12及びアクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12を介して、カメラマイコン34とアクセサリーマイコン210とが通信可能に接続される。また、レンズ側端子群LCGの第12の端子LC12及びアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第12の端子A2C12を介して、レンズマイコン114とアクセサリーマイコン210とが通信可能に接続される。 Thus, the camera microcomputer 34 and the accessory microcomputer 210 are communicably connected via the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera side terminal group CCG and the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG. Further, the lens microcomputer 114 and the accessory microcomputer 210 are communicably connected via the twelfth terminal LC12 of the lens side terminal group LCG and the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory side second terminal group A2CG.
 バイパス制御部214は、カメラマイコン34とレンズマイコン114とが、アクセサリーマイコン210を経由せずに通信するためのバイパス機構のオンオフを制御する制御部である。バイパス機構は、次のように構成される。 The bypass control unit 214 is a control unit that controls on / off of a bypass mechanism for the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 to communicate without going through the accessory microcomputer 210. The bypass mechanism is configured as follows.
 〈バイパス機構〉
 (A)バイパス機構の構成
 図13に示すように、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12とアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第12の端子A2C12との間には、アクセサリーマイコン210を回避するようにバイパス線232が接続される。
<Bypass mechanism>
(A) Configuration of Bypass Mechanism As shown in FIG. 13, an accessory microcomputer 210 is provided between the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG and the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG. The bypass line 232 is connected so as to avoid the above.
 バイパス線232には、第1のスイッチとしての第1のFET(FET:Field-Effect Transistor/電界効果トランジスター)234、及び、第2のスイッチとしての第2のFET236が接続される。 The bypass line 232 is connected to a first FET (FET: Field-Effect / Transistor / Field Effect Transistor) 234 as a first switch and a second FET 236 as a second switch.
 第1のFET234は、そのソース端子がバイパス線232を介してアクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12に接続される。また、そのドレイン端子がバイパス線232を介して第2のFET236のドレイン端子に接続される。 The source terminal of the first FET 234 is connected to the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG via the bypass line 232. The drain terminal is connected to the drain terminal of the second FET 236 via the bypass line 232.
 また、第2のFET236は、そのソース端子がバイパス線232を介してアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第12の端子A2C12に接続される。 The source terminal of the second FET 236 is connected to the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG via the bypass line 232.
 第1のFET234及び第2のFET236は、それぞれゲート端子が、第2の接続配線AL2と第6の接続配線AL6とを接続する配線238に接続される。 The gate terminal of each of the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 is connected to a wiring 238 that connects the second connection wiring AL2 and the sixth connection wiring AL6.
 配線238には、第3のスイッチとしての第3のFET240及びプルアップ抵抗242が接続される。 The third FET 240 as a third switch and a pull-up resistor 242 are connected to the wiring 238.
 上記のように、第2の接続配線AL2は、最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1を供給する配線として機能するので、配線238に接続された第1のFET234及び第2のFET236は、それぞれゲート端子が第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1の電位にプルアップされる。 As described above, since the second connection wiring AL2 functions as a wiring for supplying the first lens driving power supply LV1 having the lowest voltage, the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 connected to the wiring 238 , Each gate terminal is pulled up to the potential of the first lens driving power supply LV1.
 第3のFET240は、そのドレイン端子が配線238を介してプルアップ抵抗242に接続される。また、そのソース端子が、配線238を介して、第6の接続配線AL6に接続される。第6の接続配線AL6は、グランド線として機能するので、第3のFET240は、ソース端子が接地される。 The drain terminal of the third FET 240 is connected to the pull-up resistor 242 via the wiring 238. The source terminal is connected to the sixth connection wiring AL6 through the wiring 238. Since the sixth connection wiring AL6 functions as a ground line, the source terminal of the third FET 240 is grounded.
 また、第3のFET240は、そのゲート端子が、配線244を介してアクセサリーマイコン210の第3のポートAP3に接続される。バイパス制御部214として機能するアクセサリーマイコン210は、この第3のポートAP3の極性(HIGHレベル又はLOWレベル)を制御して、バイパス機構のオンオフを制御する。 The gate terminal of the third FET 240 is connected to the third port AP3 of the accessory microcomputer 210 via the wiring 244. The accessory microcomputer 210 functioning as the bypass control unit 214 controls the polarity (HIGH level or LOW level) of the third port AP3 to control on / off of the bypass mechanism.
 (B)バイパス機構の動作
 アクセサリー200を装着した場合において、カメラマイコン34とレンズマイコン114とが、アクセサリーマイコン210を経由して通信するモードを通常通信モードとし、カメラマイコン34とレンズマイコン114とが、アクセサリーマイコン210を経由せずに通信するモードをバイパスモードとする。通常通信モードでは、バイパス機構がオフされ、バイパスモードでは、バイパス機構がオンされる。
(B) Operation of Bypass Mechanism When the accessory 200 is mounted, the mode in which the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 communicate via the accessory microcomputer 210 is the normal communication mode, and the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 are A mode in which communication is performed without going through the accessory microcomputer 210 is referred to as a bypass mode. In the normal communication mode, the bypass mechanism is turned off, and in the bypass mode, the bypass mechanism is turned on.
 (1)通常通信モード
 通常通信モードでは、バイパス機構がオフされる。この場合、アクセサリーマイコン210は、そのアクセサリーマイコン入出力ポート216の第3のポートAP3の極性をHIGHレベルに設定する。これにより、第3のFET240のゲート端子がHIGHレベルに設定され、スイッチとしての第3のFET240がオンとなる。
(1) Normal communication mode In the normal communication mode, the bypass mechanism is turned off. In this case, the accessory microcomputer 210 sets the polarity of the third port AP3 of the accessory microcomputer input / output port 216 to the HIGH level. As a result, the gate terminal of the third FET 240 is set to the HIGH level, and the third FET 240 as a switch is turned on.
 一方、スイッチとしての第3のFET240がオンとなることにより、第1のFET234及び第2のFET236のゲート端子が、それぞれLOWレベルに設定される。これにより、スイッチとしての第1のFET234及び第2のFET236がオフとなる。この結果、バイパス線232が切断され、バイパス機構がオフされる。 On the other hand, when the third FET 240 as a switch is turned on, the gate terminals of the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 are set to the LOW level. Thereby, the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 as switches are turned off. As a result, the bypass line 232 is disconnected and the bypass mechanism is turned off.
 これにより、アクセサリーマイコン210を介して、カメラマイコン34とレンズマイコン114とが通信可能になる。より具体的には、アクセサリーマイコン210とカメラマイコン34とが通信可能に接続され、かつ、アクセサリーマイコン210とレンズマイコン114とが通信可能に接続される。 Thereby, the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 can communicate with each other via the accessory microcomputer 210. More specifically, the accessory microcomputer 210 and the camera microcomputer 34 are communicably connected, and the accessory microcomputer 210 and the lens microcomputer 114 are communicably connected.
 なお、ここでの通信は、単線式シリアル通信(単線による単方向の調歩同期式シリアル通信)となる。この場合、レンズマイコン114からアクセサリーマイコン210にデータが送信され、かつ、アクセサリーマイコン210からカメラマイコン34にデータが送信される。 Note that the communication here is single-wire serial communication (unidirectional asynchronous serial communication using a single wire). In this case, data is transmitted from the lens microcomputer 114 to the accessory microcomputer 210, and data is transmitted from the accessory microcomputer 210 to the camera microcomputer 34.
 (2)バイパスモード
 バイパスモードでは、バイパス機構がオンされる。この場合、アクセサリーマイコン210は、そのアクセサリーマイコン入出力ポート216の第3のポートAP3の極性をLOWレベルに設定する。これにより、スイッチとしての第3のFET240がオフとなる。
(2) Bypass mode In the bypass mode, the bypass mechanism is turned on. In this case, the accessory microcomputer 210 sets the polarity of the third port AP3 of the accessory microcomputer input / output port 216 to the LOW level. Thereby, the third FET 240 as a switch is turned off.
 一方、スイッチとしての第3のFET240がオフとなると、第1のFET234及び第2のFET236のゲート端子が、それぞれHIGHレベルに設定される。これにより、スイッチとしての第1のFET234及び第2のFET236がオンとなる。この結果、バイパス線232が開通し、バイパス機構がオンされる。 On the other hand, when the third FET 240 as a switch is turned off, the gate terminals of the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 are set to the HIGH level. As a result, the first FET 234 and the second FET 236 as switches are turned on. As a result, the bypass line 232 is opened and the bypass mechanism is turned on.
 これにより、アクセサリーマイコン210を経由せずにカメラマイコン34とレンズマイコン114とが直接通信できるように設定される。 Thereby, the camera microcomputer 34 and the lens microcomputer 114 are set to communicate directly without going through the accessory microcomputer 210.
 〈アクセサリー側システム電源生成部〉
 アクセサリーマイコン210を動作させるためのシステム電源は、アクセサリー内に備えられたアクセサリー側システム電源生成部250によって生成される。アクセサリー側システム電源生成部250は、交換レンズ100に備えられたレンズ側システム電源生成部112と同様に、カメラ10から供給されるレンズ駆動用電源を使用して、アクセサリーマイコン210のシステム電源を生成する。
<Accessory side system power generator>
A system power supply for operating the accessory microcomputer 210 is generated by an accessory-side system power generation unit 250 provided in the accessory. The accessory-side system power generation unit 250 generates the system power for the accessory microcomputer 210 using the lens driving power supplied from the camera 10, as with the lens-side system power generation unit 112 provided in the interchangeable lens 100. To do.
 ここで、アクセサリーマイコン210は、交換レンズ100に備えられたレンズ駆動部110を構成する各駆動部よりも低い電圧で作動する構成とされる。たとえば、+3.3Vで作動する構成とされる。 Here, the accessory microcomputer 210 is configured to operate at a voltage lower than that of each driving unit that constitutes the lens driving unit 110 provided in the interchangeable lens 100. For example, it is configured to operate at + 3.3V.
 アクセサリー側システム電源生成部250は、カメラ10から供給される複数のレンズ駆動用電源LV1~LV3のうち最も低い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源LV1(+5V)を使用して、アクセサリーマイコン210のシステム電源(+3.3V)を生成する。このため、アクセサリー側システム電源生成部250は、電源端子である第2の端子に接続された第2の接続配線AL2に接続される。 The accessory-side system power supply generation unit 250 uses the lens drive power supply LV1 (+5 V) having the lowest voltage among the plurality of lens drive power supplies LV1 to LV3 supplied from the camera 10 to use the system power supply ( + 3.3V). For this reason, the accessory side system power generation unit 250 is connected to the second connection wiring AL2 connected to the second terminal which is a power supply terminal.
 なお、アクセサリー側システム電源生成部250もレンズ側システム電源生成部112と同様に抵抗による電圧降下によりシステム電源を生成する。これにより、システム電源の生成に伴うノイズの発生を防止できる。アクセサリー側システム電源生成部250は、たとえば、LDOレギュレーターで構成される。 Note that the accessory-side system power supply generation unit 250 also generates a system power supply by a voltage drop due to resistance, like the lens-side system power supply generation unit 112. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of noise accompanying the generation of the system power supply. The accessory-side system power supply generation unit 250 is configured with, for example, an LDO regulator.
 〈その他の構成〉
 アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12は、プルダウン抵抗AR12を介して接地され、グランドの電位にプルダウンされる。これにより、アクセサリー200をカメラ10に装着した際、カメラ10の第12の端子CC12がLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定される。カメラマイコン34は、第12の端子CC12がLOWレベル(第2極性)であることを検出することにより、カメラ10にアクセサリー200が装着されたことを検出できる。
<Other configuration>
The twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG is grounded via the pull-down resistor AR12 and pulled down to the ground potential. Thereby, when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10, the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 is set to the LOW level (second polarity). The camera microcomputer 34 can detect that the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10 by detecting that the twelfth terminal CC12 is at the LOW level (second polarity).
 なお、このアクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12に接続されたプルダウン抵抗AR12は、交換レンズ100の第12の端子LC12に接続されたプルアップ抵抗LR12よりも大きな抵抗値を有する。たとえば、交換レンズ100の第12の端子LC12に接続されたプルアップ抵抗LR12が2.2kΩ、アクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12に接続されたプルダウン抵抗AR12が220kΩで構成される。これにより、たとえば、アクセサリー200のモードが、バイパスモードに設定されている場合であっても、カメラ10の第12の端子CC12をLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定できる。 The pull-down resistor AR12 connected to the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG has a larger resistance value than the pull-up resistor LR12 connected to the twelfth terminal LC12 of the interchangeable lens 100. For example, the pull-up resistor LR12 connected to the twelfth terminal LC12 of the interchangeable lens 100 is configured with 2.2 kΩ, and the pull-down resistor AR12 connected with the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory side first terminal group A1CG is configured with 220 kΩ. . Thereby, for example, even when the mode of the accessory 200 is set to the bypass mode, the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 can be set to the LOW level (second polarity).
 この場合、交換レンズ100の第12の端子LC12(レンズ側拡張通信端子)に接続されたプルアップ抵抗LR12がレンズ側拡張通信端子極性設定部として機能し、アクセサリー200の第12の端子A1C12(アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子)に接続されたプルダウン抵抗AR12がアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子極性設定部として機能する。また、カメラマイコン34がアクセサリー検出部として機能する。アクセサリー検出部としての機能は、カメラマイコン34が、所定のプログラムを実行することにより提供される。 In this case, the pull-up resistor LR12 connected to the twelfth terminal LC12 (lens side extended communication terminal) of the interchangeable lens 100 functions as a lens side extended communication terminal polarity setting unit, and the twelfth terminal A1C12 (accessory of the accessory 200). Pull-down resistor AR12 connected to the first side extended communication terminal) functions as an accessory side first extended communication terminal polarity setting unit. The camera microcomputer 34 functions as an accessory detection unit. The function as the accessory detection unit is provided by the camera microcomputer 34 executing a predetermined program.
 また、アクセサリーマイコン210のアクセサリーマイコン入出力ポート216は、第4のポートAP4を備える。第4のポートAP4は、入力用の通信用ポートとして機能し、配線260を介して第7の接続配線AL7に接続される。これにより、第7の接続配線AL7を介して送信される情報をアクセサリーマイコン210で受信できる。 Further, the accessory microcomputer input / output port 216 of the accessory microcomputer 210 includes a fourth port AP4. The fourth port AP4 functions as an input communication port and is connected to the seventh connection wiring AL7 via the wiring 260. Thereby, the information transmitted via the seventh connection wiring AL7 can be received by the accessory microcomputer 210.
 [カメラシステムの作用]
 図15は、カメラと交換レンズとの間にアクセサリーを装着した場合の相互の電気的な接続を示す図である。
[Operation of camera system]
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the electrical connection when accessories are mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens.
 《アクセサリーの装着》
 アクセサリー200に備えられたアクセサリー側第1マウント204Aをカメラ10に備えられたカメラ側マウント14に装着することにより、アクセサリー200がカメラ10に装着される。この際、カメラ10に対してアクセサリー200を回転させて装着する。
《Attaching accessories》
The accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10 by attaching the accessory-side first mount 204 </ b> A provided in the accessory 200 to the camera-side mount 14 provided in the camera 10. At this time, the accessory 200 is rotated and attached to the camera 10.
 また、交換レンズ100に備えられたレンズ側マウント104をアクセサリー200に備えられたアクセサリー側第2マウント204Bに装着することにより、交換レンズ100がアクセサリー200に装着される。この際、アクセサリー200に対して交換レンズ100を回転させて装着する。 Further, the interchangeable lens 100 is attached to the accessory 200 by attaching the lens side mount 104 provided in the interchangeable lens 100 to the accessory side second mount 204B provided in the accessory 200. At this time, the interchangeable lens 100 is rotated and attached to the accessory 200.
 これにより、交換レンズ100とカメラ10との間にアクセサリー200が装着される。アクセサリー200を装着することにより、交換レンズ100のレンズ側端子群LCGが、アクセサリー200のアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGに接続される。また、カメラ10のカメラ側端子群CCGが、アクセサリー200のアクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGに接続される。 Thereby, the accessory 200 is mounted between the interchangeable lens 100 and the camera 10. By attaching the accessory 200, the lens side terminal group LCG of the interchangeable lens 100 is connected to the accessory side second terminal group A2CG of the accessory 200. Further, the camera side terminal group CCG of the camera 10 is connected to the accessory side first terminal group A1CG of the accessory 200.
 《カメラと交換レンズとの間の電気的な接続》
 (A)第1の端子
 アクセサリー200が装着されることにより、レンズ検出端子であるカメラ10の第1の端子CC1は、アクセサリー200の第1の接続配線AL1を介して、交換レンズ100の第1の端子LC1と電気的に接続される。これにより、カメラ10において、交換レンズ100の装着を検出できる。
《Electrical connection between camera and interchangeable lens》
(A) First Terminal When the accessory 200 is attached, the first terminal CC1 of the camera 10 that is a lens detection terminal is connected to the first terminal of the interchangeable lens 100 via the first connection wiring AL1 of the accessory 200. The terminal LC1 is electrically connected. Thereby, it is possible to detect the mounting of the interchangeable lens 100 in the camera 10.
 (B)第2の端子~第4の端子
 アクセサリー200が装着されることにより、第1の電源端子であるカメラ10の第2の端子CC2は、アクセサリー200の第2の接続配線AL2を介して、交換レンズ100の第2の端子LC2と電気的に接続される。また、第2の電源端子であるカメラ10の第3の端子CC3は、アクセサリー200の第3の接続配線AL3を介して、交換レンズ100の第3の端子LC3と電気的に接続される。また、第3の電源端子であるカメラ10の第4の端子CC4は、アクセサリー200の第4の接続配線AL4を介して、交換レンズ100の第4の端子LC4と電気的に接続される。
(B) Second Terminal to Fourth Terminal By attaching the accessory 200, the second terminal CC2 of the camera 10 that is the first power supply terminal is connected via the second connection wiring AL2 of the accessory 200. , And electrically connected to the second terminal LC2 of the interchangeable lens 100. Further, the third terminal CC3 of the camera 10 which is the second power supply terminal is electrically connected to the third terminal LC3 of the interchangeable lens 100 via the third connection wiring AL3 of the accessory 200. Further, the fourth terminal CC4 of the camera 10 that is the third power supply terminal is electrically connected to the fourth terminal LC4 of the interchangeable lens 100 via the fourth connection wiring AL4 of the accessory 200.
 これにより、カメラ10から交換レンズ100にレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3を供給できる。 Thereby, the lens driving power supplies LV1, LV2, and LV3 can be supplied from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100.
 (C)第5の端子及び第6の端子
 アクセサリー200が装着されることにより、グランド端子であるカメラ10の第5の端子CC5及び第6の端子CC6は、アクセサリー200の第5の接続配線AL5A、AL5B及び第6の接続配線AL6を介して、交換レンズ100の第5の端子LC5及び第6の端子LC6と電気的に接続できる。
(C) Fifth Terminal and Sixth Terminal When the accessory 200 is attached, the fifth terminal CC5 and the sixth terminal CC6 of the camera 10 that are ground terminals are connected to the fifth connection wiring AL5A of the accessory 200. , AL5B and the sixth connection wiring AL6 can be electrically connected to the fifth terminal LC5 and the sixth terminal LC6 of the interchangeable lens 100.
 (D)第7の端子~第12の端子
 アクセサリー200が装着されることにより、通信端子であるカメラ10の第7の端子CC7~第11の端子CC11は、アクセサリー200の第7の接続配線AL7~第11の接続配線AL11を介して、交換レンズ100の第7の端子LC7~第11の端子LC11と電気的に接続される。これにより、カメラ10と交換レンズ100との間で3線式シリアル通信等が可能になる。
(D) Seventh terminal to twelfth terminal When the accessory 200 is attached, the seventh terminal CC7 to the eleventh terminal CC11 of the camera 10 which is a communication terminal are connected to the seventh connection wiring AL7 of the accessory 200. Are electrically connected to the seventh terminal LC7 to the eleventh terminal LC11 of the interchangeable lens 100 via the eleventh connection wiring AL11. As a result, three-wire serial communication or the like can be performed between the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100.
 また、アクセサリー200が装着されることにより、カメラ側拡張通信端子であるカメラ10の第12の端子CC12は、アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子であるアクセサリー200の第12の端子A1C12及び第12の接続配線AL12Aを介してアクセサリーマイコン210と電気的に接続される。また、レンズ側拡張通信端子である交換レンズ100の第12の端子LC12は、アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子であるアクセサリー200の第12の端子A2C12及び第12の接続配線AL12Bを介してアクセサリーマイコン210と電気的に接続される。これにより、カメラマイコン34とアクセサリーマイコン210との間で通信が可能になり、かつ、レンズマイコン114とアクセサリーマイコン210との間で通信が可能になる。 In addition, when the accessory 200 is attached, the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 that is the camera side extended communication terminal is connected to the twelfth terminal A1C12 and the twelfth connection of the accessory 200 that is the accessory side first extended communication terminal. It is electrically connected to the accessory microcomputer 210 via the wiring AL12A. The twelfth terminal LC12 of the interchangeable lens 100 that is the lens side extended communication terminal is connected to the accessory microcomputer 210 via the twelfth terminal A2C12 and the twelfth connection wiring AL12B of the accessory 200 that is the accessory side second extended communication terminal. And electrically connected. As a result, communication between the camera microcomputer 34 and the accessory microcomputer 210 becomes possible, and communication between the lens microcomputer 114 and the accessory microcomputer 210 becomes possible.
 《アクセサリーの装着の検出》
 上記のように、カメラマイコン34は、第12の端子CC12の極性を判別することで、アクセサリー200の装着の有無を検出できる。
<Detection of wearing accessories>
As described above, the camera microcomputer 34 can detect the presence or absence of the accessory 200 by determining the polarity of the twelfth terminal CC12.
 上記のように、アクセサリー200をカメラ10に装着すると、カメラ10の第12の端子CC12がLOWレベルに設定される。カメラマイコン34は、第12の端子CC12がLOWレベルであることを検出することにより、カメラ10にアクセサリー200が装着されたと判定する。 As described above, when the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10, the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10 is set to the LOW level. The camera microcomputer 34 determines that the accessory 200 is attached to the camera 10 by detecting that the twelfth terminal CC12 is at the LOW level.
 《アクセサリーマイコンの起動》
 カメラ10から交換レンズ100にレンズ駆動用電源LV1、LV2、LV3が供給されると、その一部がアクセサリー側システム電源生成部250に供給される。具体的には、最も低い電圧の第1のレンズ駆動用電源LV1(+5V)が、アクセサリー側システム電源生成部250に供給される。アクセサリー側システム電源生成部250は、供給されたレンズ駆動用電源LV1を使用して、アクセサリーマイコン210のシステム電源(+3.3V)を生成し、アクセサリーマイコン210に供給する。これにより、アクセサリーマイコン210が起動する。
<Activation of accessory microcomputer>
When the lens driving power supplies LV 1, LV 2, and LV 3 are supplied from the camera 10 to the interchangeable lens 100, some of them are supplied to the accessory-side system power generation unit 250. Specifically, the first lens driving power supply LV 1 (+5 V) having the lowest voltage is supplied to the accessory-side system power generation unit 250. The accessory-side system power generation unit 250 generates the system power (+3.3 V) of the accessory microcomputer 210 using the supplied lens driving power LV1 and supplies the system power to the accessory microcomputer 210. As a result, the accessory microcomputer 210 is activated.
 《アクセサリー情報の取得》
 カメラ10及び交換レンズ100がアクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えている場合、アクセサリー200からカメラ10にアクセサリー情報が送信される。
<< Acquisition of accessory information >>
When the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200, accessory information is transmitted from the accessory 200 to the camera 10.
 ここで、アクセサリー情報とは、そのアクセサリー200の仕様を示す情報である。アクセサリー情報には、たとえば、アクセサリー機種データ、アクセサリー装着位置データ、光学補正データ等が含まれる。アクセサリー機種データには、アクセサリー機種名、アクセサリー種別、メーカー名、プロダクトID等が含まれる。アクセサリー装着位置データには、有効なアクセサリーの装着位置のデータ、装着数のデータ等が含まれる。光学補正データには、アクセサリーを装着した場合の画像の補正データ等が含まれる。アクセサリー情報は、アクセサリーマイコン210のROMに格納される。アクセサリー200は、カメラマイコン34と通信し、アクセサリー情報をカメラマイコン34に送信する。 Here, the accessory information is information indicating the specifications of the accessory 200. The accessory information includes, for example, accessory model data, accessory mounting position data, optical correction data, and the like. The accessory model data includes an accessory model name, an accessory type, a manufacturer name, a product ID, and the like. The accessory mounting position data includes effective accessory mounting position data, mounting number data, and the like. The optical correction data includes image correction data when an accessory is attached. The accessory information is stored in the ROM of the accessory microcomputer 210. The accessory 200 communicates with the camera microcomputer 34 and transmits accessory information to the camera microcomputer 34.
 この際、アクセサリーマイコン210は、事前に取得したレンズ情報にアクセサリー情報を付加して、アクセサリー情報をカメラマイコン34に送信する。すなわち、アクセサリーマイコン210は、カメラマイコン34と通信して、そのアクセサリー情報をカメラマイコン34に送信する前に、レンズマイコン114と通信し、レンズマイコン114からレンズ情報を取得する。そして、その取得したレンズ情報にアクセサリー情報を付加して、カメラマイコン34に送信する。 At this time, the accessory microcomputer 210 adds the accessory information to the lens information acquired in advance, and transmits the accessory information to the camera microcomputer 34. That is, the accessory microcomputer 210 communicates with the camera microcomputer 34 and communicates with the lens microcomputer 114 and acquires lens information from the lens microcomputer 114 before transmitting the accessory information to the camera microcomputer 34. Then, accessory information is added to the acquired lens information and transmitted to the camera microcomputer 34.
 ところで、このような方法でのレンズ情報及びアクセサリー情報の取得は、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方がアクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えている場合にのみ実現できる。 Incidentally, acquisition of lens information and accessory information by such a method can be realized only when both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200.
 そこで、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100が装着されると、互換性の有無の判定として、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方でアクセサリー200と通信する機能の有無が判定される。 Therefore, when the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 are attached, it is determined whether or not there is a function of communicating with the accessory 200 in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 as determination of compatibility.
 具体的な判定方法は、上記第1の実施の形態で説明した方法と同じである。すなわち、カメラ側通信端子であるカメラ側の第11の端子CC11及びレンズ側通信端子である交換レンズ側の第11の端子LC11の極性を検出し、共にHIGHレベルの場合に互換性あり、と判定する。すなわち、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方がアクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えている、と判定する。 The specific determination method is the same as the method described in the first embodiment. That is, the polarities of the camera-side eleventh terminal CC11 that is the camera-side communication terminal and the eleventh terminal LC11 on the interchangeable lens side that is the lens-side communication terminal are detected, and are determined to be compatible when both are at the HIGH level. To do. That is, it is determined that both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200.
 なお、極性の設定は、次のとおりである。すなわち、カメラ側において、カメラ10がアクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えている場合、第11の端子CC11の極性をHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定する。一方、カメラ10がアクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えていない場合、第11の端子CC11の極性をLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定する。また、交換レンズ側において、交換レンズ100がアクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えている場合、第11の端子LC11の極性をHIGHレベル(第1極性)に設定する。一方、交換レンズ100がアクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えていない場合、第11の端子LC11の極性をLOWレベル(第2極性)に設定する。 The polarity settings are as follows. That is, on the camera side, when the camera 10 has a function of communicating with the accessory 200, the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to the HIGH level (first polarity). On the other hand, when the camera 10 does not have the function of communicating with the accessory 200, the polarity of the eleventh terminal CC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity). On the interchangeable lens side, when the interchangeable lens 100 has a function of communicating with the accessory 200, the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to HIGH level (first polarity). On the other hand, when the interchangeable lens 100 does not have a function of communicating with the accessory 200, the polarity of the eleventh terminal LC11 is set to the LOW level (second polarity).
 この場合、装着されたカメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方が、アクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えている場合のみ、第11の端子CC11、LC11の極性がHIGHレベル(第1極性)になる。 In this case, the polarities of the eleventh terminals CC11 and LC11 become HIGH level (first polarity) only when both the mounted camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200.
 レンズ情報及びアクセサリー情報の取得処理は、次の手順で行われる。 The lens information and accessory information acquisition process is performed according to the following procedure.
 上記の互換性の判定において、カメラ10及び交換レンズ100の双方が、アクセサリー200と通信する機能を備えていると判定すると、レンズマイコン114は、第6の通信用ポートLP6(TXDポート)からレンズ情報を出力する。 If it is determined in the above compatibility determination that both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 have a function of communicating with the accessory 200, the lens microcomputer 114 switches the lens from the sixth communication port LP6 (TXD port). Output information.
 レンズマイコン114の第6の通信用ポートLP6から出力されたレンズ情報は、レンズ側拡張通信端子である第12の端子LC12を介して、カメラ側に送信される。 The lens information output from the sixth communication port LP6 of the lens microcomputer 114 is transmitted to the camera side via the twelfth terminal LC12 which is a lens side extended communication terminal.
 カメラ側に送信されたレンズ情報は、アクセサリー200のアクセサリー側第2端子群A2CGの第12の端子A2C12を介してアクセサリーマイコン210に受信される。 The lens information transmitted to the camera side is received by the accessory microcomputer 210 via the twelfth terminal A2C12 of the accessory-side second terminal group A2CG of the accessory 200.
 アクセサリーマイコン210は、交換レンズ100からレンズ情報を受信すると、そのレンズ情報に自身のアクセサリー情報を付加してカメラ10に送信する。送信された情報(レンズ情報+アクセサリー情報)は、アクセサリー200のアクセサリー側第1端子群A1CGの第12の端子A1C12から出力され、カメラ10の第12の端子CC12を介してカメラマイコン34に受信される。 When the accessory microcomputer 210 receives lens information from the interchangeable lens 100, it adds its own accessory information to the lens information and transmits it to the camera 10. The transmitted information (lens information + accessory information) is output from the twelfth terminal A1C12 of the accessory-side first terminal group A1CG of the accessory 200, and is received by the camera microcomputer 34 via the twelfth terminal CC12 of the camera 10. The
 これにより、カメラ10は、装着されたアクセサリー200及び交換レンズ100の情報を同時に取得できる。 Thereby, the camera 10 can acquire information of the attached accessory 200 and the interchangeable lens 100 at the same time.
 なお、アクセサリー200を装着せずに、交換レンズ100がカメラ10に直接装着された場合であって、互換性あり、と判定された場合、上記第1の実施の形態と同様に、レンズ情報のみがカメラ10に送信される。 If it is determined that the interchangeable lens 100 is directly attached to the camera 10 without attaching the accessory 200 and is compatible, only the lens information is obtained as in the first embodiment. Is transmitted to the camera 10.
 《通信設定》
 上記第1の実施の形態のカメラシステム1と同様に、互換性有無の判定後、カメラ10と交換レンズ100の双方で通信設定が行われる。通信設定は、上述したレンズ情報及びアクセサリー情報の取得処理と並行して行われる。これにより、起動を高速化できる。
<Communication settings>
Similar to the camera system 1 of the first embodiment, communication settings are performed in both the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 after determining compatibility. The communication setting is performed in parallel with the lens information and accessory information acquisition process described above. Thereby, start-up can be speeded up.
 《カメラ側拡張通信端子及びレンズ側拡張通信端子の用途の切り換え》
 上記第1の実施の形態のカメラシステム1と同様に、レンズ情報及びアクセサリー情報が取得された後、カメラ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子CC12)及びレンズ側拡張通信端子(第12の端子LC12)は、他の用途で使用される。具体的には、交換レンズ100の状態を交換レンズ100からカメラ10に通知するための端子として使用される。この際、アクセサリー200は、バイパスモードに切り換えられる。これにより、アクセサリー200を介さずに直接、カメラ10と交換レンズ100とが通信できる。
<Switching the use of the camera side extended communication terminal and lens side extended communication terminal>
Similar to the camera system 1 of the first embodiment, after the lens information and the accessory information are acquired, the camera side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal CC12) and the lens side extended communication terminal (the twelfth terminal LC12) are acquired. ) Is used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as a terminal for notifying the camera 10 of the state of the interchangeable lens 100 from the interchangeable lens 100. At this time, the accessory 200 is switched to the bypass mode. Thereby, the camera 10 and the interchangeable lens 100 can communicate directly, without going through the accessory 200.
 ◆◆その他の実施の形態◆◆
 [判定対象]
 互換性の有無を判定する際に、その判定の対象となる機能は、特に限定されない。あらかじめ定められた機能への対応の有無が判定される。
◆◆ Other embodiments ◆◆
[Judgment target]
When determining the presence or absence of compatibility, the function to be determined is not particularly limited. The presence / absence of correspondence to a predetermined function is determined.
 [アクセサリーの検出]
 上記実施の形態では、レンズからカメラに向けてレンズ情報を送信し、そのレンズ情報にアクセサリー情報を付加することで、アクセサリーの装着の有無及び種類を検出する構成としているが、レンズ情報の取得とは、別にアクセサリーの検出処理を行う構成としてもよい。たとえば、レンズ情報を含まないアクセサリー検出用データをレンズからカメラに向けて送信し、そのアクセサリー検出用データにアクセサリー情報を付加して、アクセサリーの装着の有無及び種類を検出する構成としてもよい。この場合、レンズ情報は、別途取得される。たとえば、3線式シリアル通信により取得される。この場合、カメラ側からレンズ側にレンズ情報の送信要求を送信する。レンズ側は、この送信要求に応じてカメラ側にレンズ情報を送信する。
[Accessory detection]
In the above embodiment, the lens information is transmitted from the lens to the camera, and the accessory information is added to the lens information to detect the presence and type of the accessory. May be configured to perform accessory detection processing separately. For example, the configuration may be such that accessory detection data that does not include lens information is transmitted from the lens to the camera, and accessory information is added to the accessory detection data to detect the presence and type of the accessory. In this case, lens information is acquired separately. For example, it is acquired by three-wire serial communication. In this case, a transmission request for lens information is transmitted from the camera side to the lens side. In response to this transmission request, the lens side transmits lens information to the camera side.
 [カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の構成]
 上記実施の形態では、端子の極性に基づく互換性判定を可能にするため、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の双方をオープンドレイン出力が可能な端子で構成しているが、端子の極性に基づく互換性判定を可能にするための構成は、これに限定されるものではない。この他、たとえば、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の双方をオープンコレクタ出力が可能な端子で構成することによっても同様の機能を実現できる。また、カメラ側通信端子及びレンズ側通信端子の一方をオープンドレイン出力が可能な端子で構成し、他方をオープンコレクタ出力が可能な端子で構成することによっても同様の機能を実現できる。
[Configuration of camera side communication terminal and lens side communication terminal]
In the above embodiment, in order to enable compatibility determination based on the polarity of the terminal, both the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are configured as terminals capable of open drain output. The configuration for enabling the compatibility determination based on this is not limited to this. In addition, for example, the same function can be realized by configuring both the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal with terminals capable of open collector output. The same function can also be realized by configuring one of the camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal as a terminal capable of open drain output and configuring the other as a terminal capable of open collector output.
 [レンズ駆動用電源の強化]
 電源供給部42が、特定の電源の供給能力を強化する機能(供給能力強化機能)を備え、レンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化できるように構成してもよい。この場合、電源供給部42は、複数供給するレンズ駆動用電源のうちの最も高い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化させる構成にする。
[Strengthening the lens drive power supply]
The power supply unit 42 may be configured to have a function of enhancing the supply capability of a specific power supply (supply capability enhancement function) so as to enhance the supply capability of the lens driving power supply. In this case, the power supply unit 42 is configured to enhance the supply capability of the lens driving power source having the highest voltage among the plurality of lens driving power sources to be supplied.
 供給能力を強化する態様としては、供給する電圧を高くする態様、及び/又は、供給する電流量を大きくする態様を採用できる。 As an aspect for strengthening the supply capability, an aspect in which the supplied voltage is increased and / or an amount in which the supplied current is increased can be employed.
 カメラマイコン34は、必要に応じて最も高い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化させる。たとえば、レンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化することにより駆動性能を向上できる交換レンズが装着された場合は、最も高い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化させる。 The camera microcomputer 34 enhances the supply capability of the lens driving power source with the highest voltage as necessary. For example, when an interchangeable lens that can improve the driving performance by strengthening the supply capability of the lens driving power supply is mounted, the supply capability of the lens driving power supply with the highest voltage is strengthened.
 レンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化することにより駆動性能を向上できる交換レンズであるか否かは、交換レンズごとに異なる。レンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化することにより駆動性能を向上できる交換レンズについては、その情報をレンズマイコン114のROMに格納し、レンズ情報に含めて、カメラ10に送信する。 Whether or not the lens is an interchangeable lens that can improve the driving performance by strengthening the power supply capability of the lens driving power differs for each interchangeable lens. For interchangeable lenses that can improve driving performance by strengthening the supply capability of the lens driving power supply, the information is stored in the ROM of the lens microcomputer 114, and is included in the lens information and transmitted to the camera 10.
 カメラマイコン34は、取得したレンズ情報に基づいて、装着された交換レンズが、レンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化することにより、駆動性能を向上できる交換レンズであるか否かを判断する。すなわち、供給能力が強化されたレンズ駆動用電源の供給の要否を判別する。そして、供給能力が強化されたレンズ駆動用電源の供給が必要である、と判別すると、電源供給部42の供給能力強化機能を動作させる。これにより、電源供給部42から供給能力を強化したレンズ駆動用電源が供給される。なお、この場合、上記のように、最も高い電圧のレンズ駆動用電源の供給能力が強化されて供給される。 The camera microcomputer 34 determines, based on the acquired lens information, whether or not the mounted interchangeable lens is an interchangeable lens that can improve driving performance by enhancing the power supply capability of the lens driving power supply. That is, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to supply a lens driving power source with enhanced supply capability. Then, when it is determined that the lens driving power supply with enhanced supply capability is necessary, the supply capability enhancement function of the power supply unit 42 is operated. As a result, the power for driving the lens with the enhanced supply capability is supplied from the power supply unit 42. In this case, as described above, the lens driving power supply capability with the highest voltage is enhanced and supplied.
 このように、必要に応じてレンズ駆動用電源の供給能力を強化することにより、交換レンズごとに必要な電源を適切に供給できる。また、これにより、交換レンズの高性能化が図れる。 Thus, by strengthening the power supply capability of the lens driving power as necessary, it is possible to appropriately supply the necessary power for each interchangeable lens. This also makes it possible to improve the performance of the interchangeable lens.
 [カメラシステムの構成]
 上記実施の形態では、カメラをデジタルカメラで構成しているが、本発明は、いわゆる銀塩カメラにも適用できる。
[Camera system configuration]
In the above embodiment, the camera is a digital camera, but the present invention can also be applied to a so-called silver salt camera.
 上記実施の形態では、交換レンズとして、AF機能及び絞りを備えた交換レンズを例に説明したが、交換レンズに備える機能は、これに限定されるものではない。この他、たとえば、電動式のズーム機能等を備えてもよい。電動式のズーム機能を備えた交換レンズでは、ズーム用の光学部材であるズームレンズを駆動するズーム駆動部が備えられる。 In the embodiment described above, an interchangeable lens having an AF function and an aperture has been described as an example of an interchangeable lens, but the function provided in the interchangeable lens is not limited to this. In addition, for example, an electric zoom function may be provided. An interchangeable lens having an electric zoom function includes a zoom driving unit that drives a zoom lens that is an optical member for zooming.
 アクセサリーには、上記のように、エクステンダー、エクステンションチューブ等の公知のアクセサリーを採用できる。アクセサリーに駆動部が備えられる場合は、交換レンズの場合と同様に、レンズ駆動用電源を利用して、駆動部が駆動される。 As described above, known accessories such as extenders and extension tubes can be used as accessories. When the accessory is provided with a drive unit, the drive unit is driven using a lens driving power source, as in the case of the interchangeable lens.
 [レンズ駆動用電源の種類]
 カメラから交換レンズに供給するレンズ駆動用電源の種類は、カメラシステムを構成する交換レンズに応じて適宜設定される。たとえば、カメラシステムを構成する交換レンズの一つが4つの光学部材駆動部を備えており(たとえば、フォーカス駆動部、手ブレ補正機構駆動部、絞り駆動部及びズーム駆動部)それぞれが異なる動作電圧で動作する場合、4種類のレンズ駆動用電源がカメラから供給される。この場合、電源端子として4つの端子が、カメラ側端子群及びレンズ側端子群に備えられる。
[Lens drive power supply type]
The type of lens driving power supplied from the camera to the interchangeable lens is appropriately set according to the interchangeable lens constituting the camera system. For example, one of the interchangeable lenses constituting the camera system includes four optical member driving units (for example, a focus driving unit, a camera shake correction mechanism driving unit, an aperture driving unit, and a zoom driving unit), each having a different operating voltage. In operation, four types of lens driving power are supplied from the camera. In this case, four terminals as power supply terminals are provided in the camera side terminal group and the lens side terminal group.
 [グランド端子]
 上記実施の形態では、グランド端子を二つ備えているが、グランド端子は一つで構成することもできる。なお、上記実施の形態のカメラシステムのように、グランド端子を複数備えることにより、より安定した電源供給が可能になる。
[Ground terminal]
In the above-described embodiment, two ground terminals are provided, but a single ground terminal may be used. Note that, by providing a plurality of ground terminals as in the camera system of the above embodiment, more stable power supply can be achieved.
 なお、上記実施の形態では、独立した二つのグランド端子を備えているが、二つのグランド端子を繋げてもよい。これにより、端子の面積を拡大でき、より安定した電源供給が可能になる。 In the above embodiment, two independent ground terminals are provided, but two ground terminals may be connected. Thereby, the area of a terminal can be expanded and more stable power supply becomes possible.
 [レンズマイコンにシステム電源が正常に供給されたことの検出]
 上記実施の形態では、特定の端子の極性を判別して、レンズマイコンにシステム電源が正常に供給されたことを検出しているが、極性を判別する端子は、少なくとも一つでよい。すなわち、交換レンズ側において、プルアップ抵抗を介してシステム電源の電位にプルアップする端子は、少なくとも一つあればよい。この場合、電源端子及びグランド端子を除いた少なくとも一つの端子を検出用の端子として使用する。
[Detection of normal system power supply to the lens microcomputer]
In the above embodiment, the polarity of a specific terminal is determined and it is detected that the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer. However, at least one terminal for determining the polarity may be used. That is, at least one terminal on the interchangeable lens side needs to be pulled up to the potential of the system power supply via the pull-up resistor. In this case, at least one terminal excluding the power supply terminal and the ground terminal is used as a detection terminal.
 なお、上記実施の形態のカメラシステム1のように、複数の端子の極性を判別することにより、レンズマイコンにシステム電源が正常に供給されたことを、より正確に検出できる。 Note that, as in the camera system 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to more accurately detect that the system power is normally supplied to the lens microcomputer by determining the polarities of the plurality of terminals.
 [各種の処理を行う構成]
 上記実施の形態では、各種処理を行うカメラ制御部をマイコン(カメラマイコン)で構成しているが、各種処理を行うためのハードウェア的な構成は、これに限定されるものではない。各種のプロセッサーで構成できる。各種のプロセッサーには、ソフトウェア(プログラム)を実行して各種の処理を行う処理部として機能する汎用的なプロセッサーであるCPU、FPGA(FPGA:Field Programmable Gate Array)などの製造後に回路構成を変更可能なプロセッサーであるPLD(PLD:Programmable Logic Device)、ASIC(ASIC:Application Specific Integrated Circuit)などの特定の処理を実行させるために専用に設計された回路構成を有するプロセッサーである専用電気回路などが含まれる。
[Configuration to perform various processes]
In the above-described embodiment, the camera control unit that performs various processes is configured by a microcomputer (camera microcomputer). However, the hardware configuration for performing various processes is not limited thereto. Can be configured with various processors. Various processors can be changed in circuit configuration after manufacturing a CPU, FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array), which is a general-purpose processor that functions as a processing unit that executes various processes by executing software (programs). Includes dedicated electrical circuits that are specially designed processors to execute specific processing such as PLD (PLD: Programmable Logic Device) and ASIC (ASIC: Application Specific Integrated Circuit) It is.
 一つの処理部は、これら各種のプロセッサーのうちの一つで構成されていてもよいし、同種又は異種の二つ以上のプロセッサーで構成されていてもよい。たとえば、複数のFPGAで構成されてもよいし、CPU及びFPGAの組み合わせで構成されてもよい。 One processing unit may be composed of one of these various processors, or may be composed of two or more processors of the same type or different types. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of FPGAs or a combination of a CPU and FPGA.
 また、複数の処理部を一つのプロセッサーで構成してもよい。複数の処理部を一つのプロセッサーで構成する例としては、第1に、クライアント、サーバなどのコンピューターに代表されるように、一つ以上のCPUとソフトウェアとの組合せで一つのプロセッサーを構成し、このプロセッサーが複数の処理部として機能する形態がある。第2に、システムオンチップ(SoC:System On Chip)などに代表されるように、複数の処理部を含むシステム全体の機能を一つのICチップ(IC:Integrated Circuit)で実現するプロセッサーを使用する形態がある。このように、各種の処理部は、ハードウェア的な構造として、上記各種のプロセッサーを一つ以上用いて構成される。 In addition, a plurality of processing units may be configured with one processor. As an example of configuring a plurality of processing units with one processor, first, as represented by a computer such as a client or server, one processor is configured with a combination of one or more CPUs and software, There is a form in which this processor functions as a plurality of processing units. Secondly, as represented by a system-on-chip (SoC), a processor that implements the functions of the entire system including a plurality of processing units with a single IC chip (IC: integrated circuit) is used. There is a form. As described above, the various processing units are configured by using one or more of the various processors as a hardware structure.
 更に、これらの各種のプロセッサーのハードウェア的な構造は、より具体的には、半導体素子などの回路素子を組み合わせた電気回路である。 Furthermore, the hardware structure of these various processors is more specifically an electric circuit in which circuit elements such as semiconductor elements are combined.
1 カメラシステム
10 カメラ
12 カメラボディー
14 カメラ側マウント
16 イメージセンサー
18 シャッター
20 イメージセンサー駆動部
22 シャッター駆動部
24 アナログ信号処理部
26 表示部
28 画像データ記憶部
30 カメラ操作部
32 電源部
34 カメラマイコン
40 バッテリー
42 電源供給部
44 レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ部
50 デジタル信号処理部
52 表示制御部
54 記録制御部
56 電源制御部
58 レンズ駆動用電源スイッチ制御部
60 レンズ装着検出部
62 カメラ通信部
64 カメラマイコン入出力ポート
70 カメラ側通信端子極性設定部
72 カメラ側判定部
100 交換レンズ
102 レンズ鏡胴
104 レンズ側マウント
106A フォーカスレンズ
106C 絞り
110 レンズ駆動部
110A フォーカス駆動部
110C 絞り駆動部
112 レンズ側システム電源生成部
114 レンズマイコン
120 フォーカス駆動制御部
124 絞り駆動制御部
126 レンズ通信部
128 レンズマイコン入出力ポート
130 レンズ側通信端子極性設定部
132 レンズ側判定部
200 アクセサリー
202 アクセサリーボディー
204A アクセサリー側第1マウント
204B アクセサリー側第2マウント
210 アクセサリーマイコン
212 アクセサリー通信部
214 バイパス制御部
216 アクセサリーマイコン入出力ポート
232 バイパス線
234 第1のFET
236 第2のFET
238 配線
240 第3のFET
242 プルアップ抵抗
244 配線
250 アクセサリー側システム電源生成部
260 配線
A1CG アクセサリー側第1端子群
A1C1 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第1の端子
A1C2 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第2の端子
A1C3 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第3の端子
A1C4 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第4の端子
A1C5 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第5の端子
A1C6 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第6の端子
A1C7 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第7の端子
A1C8 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第8の端子
A1C9 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第9の端子
A1C10 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第10の端子
A1C11 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第11の端子
A1C12 アクセサリー側第1端子群を構成する第12の端子
A2CG アクセサリー側第2端子群
A2C1 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第1の端子
A2C2 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第2の端子
A2C3 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第3の端子
A2C4 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第4の端子
A2C5 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第5の端子
A2C6 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第6の端子
A2C7 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第7の端子
A2C8 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第8の端子
A2C9 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第9の端子
A2C10 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第10の端子
A2C11 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第11の端子
A2C12 アクセサリー側第2端子群を構成する第12の端子
AL1 アクセサリーの第1の接続配線
AL2 アクセサリーの第2の接続配線
AL3 アクセサリーの第3の接続配線
AL4 アクセサリーの第4の接続配線
AL5A アクセサリーの第5の接続配線
AL5B アクセサリーの第5の接続配線
AL6 アクセサリーの第6の接続配線
AL7 アクセサリーの第7の接続配線
AL8 アクセサリーの第8の接続配線
AL9 アクセサリーの第9の接続配線
AL10 アクセサリーの第10の接続配線
AL11 アクセサリーの第11の接続配線
AL12A アクセサリーの第12の接続配線
AL12Bアクセサリーの 第12の接続配線
AP1 アクセサリーマイコンの第1のポート
AP2 アクセサリーマイコンの第2のポート
AP3 アクセサリーマイコンの第3のポート
AP4 アクセサリーマイコンの第4のポート
AR12 プルダウン抵抗
CCG カメラ側端子群
CC1 カメラ側端子群を構成する第1の端子
CC2 カメラ側端子群を構成する第2の端子
CC3 カメラ側端子群を構成する第3の端子
CC4 カメラ側端子群を構成する第4の端子
CC5 カメラ側端子群を構成する第5の端子
CC6 カメラ側端子群を構成する第6の端子
CC7 カメラ側端子群を構成する第7の端子
CC8 カメラ側端子群を構成する第8の端子
CC9 カメラ側端子群を構成する第9の端子
CC10 カメラ側端子群を構成する第10の端子
CC11 カメラ側端子群を構成する第11の端子
CC12 カメラ側端子群を構成する第12の端子
CP0 カメラマイコンのレンズ検出用ポート
CP1 カメラマイコンの第1の通信用ポート
CP2 カメラマイコンの第2の通信用ポート
CP3 カメラマイコンの第3の通信用ポート
CP4 カメラマイコンの第4の通信用ポート
CP5 カメラマイコンの第5の通信用ポート
CP6 カメラマイコンの第6の通信用ポート
CP7 カメラマイコンの第7の通信用ポート
CR1 プルアップ抵抗
LCG レンズ側端子群
LC1 レンズ側端子群を構成する第1の端子
LC2 レンズ側端子群を構成する第2の端子
LC3 レンズ側端子群を構成する第3の端子
LC4 レンズ側端子群を構成する第4の端子
LC5 レンズ側端子群を構成する第5の端子
LC6 レンズ側端子群を構成する第6の端子
LC7 レンズ側端子群を構成する第7の端子
LC8 レンズ側端子群を構成する第8の端子
LC9 レンズ側端子群を構成する第9の端子
LC10 レンズ側端子群を構成する第10の端子
LC11 レンズ側端子群を構成する第11の端子
LC12 レンズ側端子群を構成する第12の端子
LP1 レンズマイコンの第1の通信用ポート
LP2 レンズマイコンの第2の通信用ポート
LP3 レンズマイコンの第3の通信用ポート
LP4 レンズマイコンの第4の通信用ポート
LP5 レンズマイコンの第5の通信用ポート
LP6 レンズマイコンの第6の通信用ポート
LP7 レンズマイコンの第7の通信用ポート
LR1 プルダウン抵抗
LR7 プルアップ抵抗
LR8 プルアップ抵抗
LR9 プルダウン抵抗
LR12 プルアップ抵抗
LV1 第1のレンズ駆動用電源
LV2 第2のレンズ駆動用電源
LV3 第3のレンズ駆動用電源
R 回転方向
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Camera system 10 Camera 12 Camera body 14 Camera side mount 16 Image sensor 18 Shutter 20 Image sensor drive part 22 Shutter drive part 24 Analog signal processing part 26 Display part 28 Image data storage part 30 Camera operation part 32 Power supply part 34 Camera microcomputer 40 Battery 42 Power supply unit 44 Lens drive power switch unit 50 Digital signal processing unit 52 Display control unit 54 Recording control unit 56 Power control unit 58 Lens drive power switch control unit 60 Lens mounting detection unit 62 Camera communication unit 64 Camera microcomputer input Output port 70 Camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit 72 Camera side determination unit 100 Interchangeable lens 102 Lens barrel 104 Lens side mount 106A Focus lens 106C Aperture 110 Lens drive unit 110A Focus drive unit 1 10C Aperture Drive Unit 112 Lens Side System Power Supply Generation Unit 114 Lens Microcomputer 120 Focus Drive Control Unit 124 Aperture Drive Control Unit 126 Lens Communication Unit 128 Lens Microcomputer Input / Output Port 130 Lens Side Communication Terminal Polarity Setting Unit 132 Lens Side Determination Unit 200 Accessories 202 Accessory body 204A Accessory side first mount 204B Accessory side second mount 210 Accessory microcomputer 212 Accessory communication unit 214 Bypass control unit 216 Accessory microcomputer input / output port 232 Bypass line 234 First FET
236 second FET
238 Wiring 240 Third FET
242 Pull-up resistor 244 Wiring 250 Accessory side system power generation unit 260 Wiring A1CG Accessory side first terminal group A1C1 First terminal A1C2 constituting the accessory side first terminal group Second terminal constituting the accessory side first terminal group A1C3 Third terminal A1C4 constituting the accessory side first terminal group Fourth terminal A1C5 constituting the accessory side first terminal group Fifth terminal A1C6 constituting the accessory side first terminal group A1C3 accessory side first terminal group 6th terminal A1C7 to configure 7th terminal A1C8 to configure the first terminal group on the accessory side 8th terminal A1C9 to configure the first terminal group on the accessory side 9th terminal A1C10 to configure the first terminal group on the accessory side 10th terminal A1C11 which comprises the side 1st terminal group Eleventh terminal A1C12 composing the first side terminal group twelfth terminal A2CG composing the first accessory terminal group A2C1 accessory side second terminal group A2C1 first terminal A2C2 composing the accessory side second terminal group Accessory side Second terminal A2C3 constituting the second terminal group Third terminal A2C4 constituting the accessory side second terminal group Fourth terminal A2C5 constituting the accessory side second terminal group Second terminal group constituting the accessory side second terminal group 5 terminal A2C6 6th terminal A2C7 constituting the accessory side second terminal group 7th terminal A2C8 constituting the accessory side second terminal group 8th terminal A2C9 constituting the accessory side second terminal group Ninth terminal A2C10 constituting the terminal group Tenth terminal A2C11 constituting the accessory-side second terminal group 11th terminal A2C12 constituting the accessory side second terminal group 12th terminal AL1 constituting the accessory side second terminal group 1st connection wiring AL2 for accessory 2nd connection wiring AL3 for accessory 3rd connection for accessory Wiring AL4 Accessory fourth connection wiring AL5A Accessory fifth connection wiring AL5B Accessory fifth connection wiring AL6 Accessory sixth connection wiring AL7 Accessory seventh connection wiring AL8 Accessory eighth connection wiring AL9 Accessory 9th connection wiring AL10 Accessory 10th connection wiring AL11 Accessory 11th connection wiring AL12A Accessory 12th connection wiring AL12B Accessory 12th connection wiring AP1 Accessory microcomputer first port AP2 Accessor -Second port AP3 of the microcomputer Third port AP4 of the accessory microcomputer Fourth port AR12 of the accessory microcomputer Pull-down resistor CCG Camera side terminal group CC1 First terminal CC2 constituting the camera side terminal group Configuring the camera side terminal group 2nd terminal CC3 3rd terminal CC4 which constitutes camera side terminal group 4th terminal CC5 which constitutes camera side terminal group 5th terminal CC6 which constitutes camera side terminal group 6th which constitutes camera side terminal group Terminal CC7 7th terminal CC8 constituting the camera side terminal group 8th terminal CC9 constituting the camera side terminal group 9th terminal CC10 constituting the camera side terminal group 10th terminal constituting the camera side terminal group CC11 Eleventh terminal constituting the camera side terminal group CC12 Twelfth terminal CP0 constituting the camera side terminal group Lens detection port CP1 Camera microcomputer first communication port CP2 Camera microcomputer second communication port CP3 Camera microcomputer third communication port CP4 Camera microcomputer fourth communication port CP5 Camera microcomputer Fifth communication port CP6 Sixth communication port CP7 of the camera microcomputer Seventh communication port CR1 of the camera microcomputer Pull-up resistor LCG Lens side terminal group LC1 First terminal LC2 constituting the lens side terminal group Lens side Second terminal LC3 constituting the terminal group Third terminal LC4 constituting the lens side terminal group Fourth terminal LC5 constituting the lens side terminal group Fifth terminal LC6 constituting the lens side terminal group Lens side terminal group The sixth terminal LC7 constituting the lens side terminal group The seventh terminal LC8 constituting the lens side terminal group 8 terminal LC9 9th terminal LC10 constituting the lens side terminal group 10th terminal LC11 constituting the lens side terminal group 11th terminal LC12 constituting the lens side terminal group 12th constituting the lens side terminal group Terminal LP1 First communication port LP2 of lens microcomputer Second communication port LP3 of lens microcomputer Third communication port LP4 of lens microcomputer Fourth communication port LP5 of lens microcomputer For fifth communication of lens microcomputer Port LP6 Sixth communication port LP7 of the lens microcomputer Seventh communication port LR1 of the lens microcomputer Pull-down resistor LR7 Pull-up resistor LR8 Pull-up resistor LR9 Pull-down resistor LR12 Pull-up resistor LV1 First lens driving power supply LV2 Second Lens drive power supply LV3 Third lens drive power supply R Rotation Direction

Claims (18)

  1.  カメラと、前記カメラに着脱自在に装着される交換レンズと、を備えたカメラシステムであって、
     前記カメラは、
     カメラ側通信端子と、
     前記カメラ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するカメラ側通信端子極性設定部であって、前記カメラが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するカメラ側通信端子極性設定部と、
     前記カメラ側通信端子の極性を検出し、検出した極性が第1極性の場合に前記交換レンズが前記特定の機能に対応していると判定するカメラ側判定部と、
     を備え、
     前記交換レンズは、
     前記カメラに装着された場合に前記カメラ側通信端子に接続されるレンズ側通信端子と、
     前記レンズ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するレンズ側通信端子極性設定部であって、前記交換レンズが、前記特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するレンズ側通信端子極性設定部と、
     前記レンズ側通信端子の極性を検出し、検出した極性が第1極性の場合に前記カメラが前記特定の機能に対応していると判定するレンズ側判定部と、
     を備え、
     前記カメラ側通信端子及び前記レンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる、
     カメラシステム。
    A camera system comprising a camera and an interchangeable lens detachably attached to the camera,
    The camera
    Camera side communication terminal,
    A camera-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the camera-side communication terminal to the first polarity or the second polarity, and when the camera supports a specific function, sets the first polarity, If not compatible, the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit to set the second polarity,
    A camera-side determination unit that detects the polarity of the camera-side communication terminal and determines that the interchangeable lens corresponds to the specific function when the detected polarity is a first polarity;
    With
    The interchangeable lens is
    A lens-side communication terminal connected to the camera-side communication terminal when mounted on the camera;
    A lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the lens-side communication terminal to the first polarity or the second polarity, and is set to the first polarity when the interchangeable lens is compatible with the specific function If not compatible, the lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit to set the second polarity,
    A lens side determination unit that detects the polarity of the lens side communication terminal and determines that the camera is compatible with the specific function when the detected polarity is a first polarity;
    With
    The camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both set to the first polarity only when both are set to the first polarity and at least one is set to the second polarity. In both cases, both are of the second polarity,
    Camera system.
  2.  前記カメラ側通信端子及び前記レンズ側通信端子は、それぞれ前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズがシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つであり、
     前記カメラは、前記カメラ側判定部による判定後に、前記交換レンズとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うカメラ側通信設定部を更に備え、
     前記交換レンズは、前記レンズ側判定部による判定後に、前記カメラとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うレンズ側通信設定部を更に備える、
     請求項1に記載のカメラシステム。
    The camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are each one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication.
    The camera further includes a camera-side communication setting unit configured to perform communication settings of a plurality of terminals used when serially communicating with the interchangeable lens after being determined by the camera-side determination unit.
    The interchangeable lens further includes a lens-side communication setting unit configured to set communication of a plurality of terminals used when serially communicating with the camera after the determination by the lens-side determination unit.
    The camera system according to claim 1.
  3.  前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズの間に着脱自在に装着されるアクセサリーを更に含み、
     前記特定の機能は、前記アクセサリーが装着された場合に、装着された前記アクセサリーと通信する機能である、
     請求項1又は2に記載のカメラシステム。
    An accessory that is detachably mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens;
    The specific function is a function of communicating with the attached accessory when the accessory is attached.
    The camera system according to claim 1 or 2.
  4.  前記カメラは、カメラ側拡張通信端子を更に備え、
     前記交換レンズは、前記カメラに装着された場合に前記カメラ側拡張通信端子に接続されるレンズ側拡張通信端子を更に備え、
     前記アクセサリーは、前記カメラに装着された場合に前記カメラ側拡張通信端子に接続されるアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子と、前記交換レンズが装着された場合に前記レンズ側拡張通信端子に接続されるアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子と、を備え、
     前記交換レンズが前記カメラに直接装着された場合、前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズは、前記カメラ側拡張通信端子及び前記レンズ側拡張通信端子を介して通信し、
     前記アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズの双方が前記特定の機能に対応している場合、前記カメラ及び前記アクセサリーは、前記カメラ側拡張通信端子及び前記アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介して通信し、前記交換レンズ及び前記アクセサリーは、前記レンズ側拡張通信端子及び前記アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介して通信する、
     請求項3に記載のカメラシステム。
    The camera further includes a camera side extended communication terminal,
    The interchangeable lens further includes a lens side extended communication terminal connected to the camera side extended communication terminal when attached to the camera,
    The accessory is connected to the accessory-side first extended communication terminal connected to the camera-side extended communication terminal when attached to the camera, and to the lens-side extended communication terminal when the interchangeable lens is attached. An accessory-side second extended communication terminal,
    When the interchangeable lens is directly attached to the camera, the camera and the interchangeable lens communicate via the camera side extended communication terminal and the lens side extended communication terminal,
    When the accessory is attached, and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support the specific function, the camera and the accessory are the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first. Communicating via an extended communication terminal, the interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate via the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication terminal,
    The camera system according to claim 3.
  5.  前記アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズの双方が前記特定の機能に対応している場合、前記カメラは、前記カメラ側拡張通信端子及び前記アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介して前記アクセサリーと通信し、前記アクセサリーから前記アクセサリーの情報を取得する、
     請求項4に記載のカメラシステム。
    When the accessory is attached, and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support the specific function, the camera has the camera side extended communication terminal and the accessory side first extended communication terminal. Communicates with the accessory via and obtains information on the accessory from the accessory,
    The camera system according to claim 4.
  6.  前記アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズの双方が前記特定の機能に対応している場合、前記交換レンズは、前記レンズ側拡張通信端子及び前記アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介して前記アクセサリーと通信し、前記交換レンズの情報を前記アクセサリーに送信し、前記アクセサリーは、前記アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子及び前記カメラ側拡張通信端子を介して前記カメラと通信し、前記交換レンズから受信した前記交換レンズの情報に前記アクセサリーの情報を付加して前記カメラに送信する、
     請求項5に記載のカメラシステム。
    When the accessory is attached and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support the specific function, the interchangeable lens is connected to the lens side extended communication terminal and the accessory side second extended communication. Communicating with the accessory via a terminal, and transmitting information about the interchangeable lens to the accessory, the accessory communicating with the camera via the accessory-side first extended communication terminal and the camera-side extended communication terminal, Adding the information of the accessory to the information of the interchangeable lens received from the interchangeable lens and transmitting the information to the camera;
    The camera system according to claim 5.
  7.  前記カメラは、前記アクセサリーの情報を取得した後、前記カメラ側拡張通信端子、前記アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子、前記アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子及び前記レンズ側拡張通信端子を介して前記交換レンズと通信し、前記交換レンズの状態の情報を前記交換レンズから取得する、
     請求項5又は6に記載のカメラシステム。
    After the camera acquires the accessory information, the interchangeable lens is connected via the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal. And obtaining information on the status of the interchangeable lens from the interchangeable lens,
    The camera system according to claim 5 or 6.
  8.  前記交換レンズは、前記レンズ側拡張通信端子の極性を第1極性に設定するレンズ側拡張通信端子極性設定部を更に備え、
     前記アクセサリーは、前記アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子の極性を第2極性に設定するアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子極性設定部を更に備え、
     前記カメラは、前記カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性を検出して、前記アクセサリーの装着を検出するアクセサリー検出部を更に備え、
     前記アクセサリー検出部は、前記カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合、前記アクセサリーが装着されていると判定し、前記カメラ側拡張通信端子の極性が第2極性の場合、前記アクセサリーが装着されていないと判定して、前記アクセサリーの装着を検出する、
     請求項4から7のいずれか1項に記載のカメラシステム。
    The interchangeable lens further includes a lens side extended communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the lens side extended communication terminal to a first polarity,
    The accessory further includes an accessory-side first extended communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the accessory-side first extended communication terminal to a second polarity,
    The camera further includes an accessory detection unit that detects the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal and detects attachment of the accessory,
    The accessory detection unit determines that the accessory is attached when the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal is the first polarity, and when the polarity of the camera side extended communication terminal is the second polarity, the accessory is It is determined that the accessory is not attached and the attachment of the accessory is detected.
    The camera system according to any one of claims 4 to 7.
  9.  交換レンズが着脱自在に装着されるカメラであって、
     前記交換レンズが装着された場合に前記交換レンズに備えられたレンズ側通信端子に接続されるカメラ側通信端子と、
     前記カメラ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するカメラ側通信端子極性設定部であって、前記カメラが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するカメラ側通信端子極性設定部と、
     前記カメラ側通信端子の極性を検出し、検出した極性が第1極性の場合に前記交換レンズが前記特定の機能に対応していると判定するカメラ側判定部と、
     を備え、
     前記交換レンズは、前記特定の機能に対応している場合、前記レンズ側通信端子の極性が第1極性に設定され、対応していない場合、前記レンズ側通信端子の極性が第2極性に設定され、
     前記カメラ側通信端子及び前記レンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる、
     カメラ。
    A camera to which an interchangeable lens is detachably attached,
    A camera-side communication terminal connected to a lens-side communication terminal provided in the interchangeable lens when the interchangeable lens is mounted;
    A camera-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the camera-side communication terminal to the first polarity or the second polarity, and when the camera supports a specific function, sets the first polarity, If not compatible, the camera side communication terminal polarity setting unit to set the second polarity,
    A camera-side determination unit that detects the polarity of the camera-side communication terminal and determines that the interchangeable lens corresponds to the specific function when the detected polarity is a first polarity;
    With
    When the interchangeable lens is compatible with the specific function, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when not compatible, the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is set to the second polarity. And
    The camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both set to the first polarity only when both are set to the first polarity and at least one is set to the second polarity. In both cases, both are of the second polarity,
    camera.
  10.  前記カメラ側通信端子は、前記カメラが前記交換レンズとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つであり、
     前記カメラ側判定部による判定後に、前記交換レンズとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うカメラ側通信設定部を更に備える、
     請求項9に記載のカメラ。
    The camera side communication terminal is one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera serially communicates with the interchangeable lens,
    A camera-side communication setting unit configured to perform communication settings of a plurality of terminals used when serially communicating with the interchangeable lens after the determination by the camera-side determination unit;
    The camera according to claim 9.
  11.  カメラに着脱自在に装着される交換レンズであって、
     前記カメラに装着された場合に前記カメラに備えられたカメラ側通信端子に接続されるレンズ側通信端子と、
     前記レンズ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するレンズ側通信端子極性設定部であって、前記交換レンズが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するレンズ側通信端子極性設定部と、
     前記レンズ側通信端子の極性を検出し、検出した極性が第1極性の場合に前記カメラが前記特定の機能に対応していると判定するレンズ側判定部と、
     を備え、
     前記カメラは、前記特定の機能に対応している場合、前記カメラ側通信端子の極性が第1極性に設定され、対応していない場合、前記カメラ側通信端子の極性が第2極性に設定され、
     前記カメラ側通信端子及び前記レンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる、
     交換レンズ。
    An interchangeable lens that is detachably attached to the camera,
    A lens-side communication terminal connected to a camera-side communication terminal provided in the camera when mounted on the camera;
    A lens-side communication terminal polarity setting unit that sets the polarity of the lens-side communication terminal to the first polarity or the second polarity, and when the interchangeable lens supports a specific function, sets the first polarity. If not compatible, the lens side communication terminal polarity setting unit to set the second polarity,
    A lens side determination unit that detects the polarity of the lens side communication terminal and determines that the camera is compatible with the specific function when the detected polarity is a first polarity;
    With
    When the camera is compatible with the specific function, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the first polarity, and when the camera is not compatible, the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is set to the second polarity. ,
    The camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both set to the first polarity only when both are set to the first polarity and at least one is set to the second polarity. In both cases, both are of the second polarity,
    interchangeable lens.
  12.  前記レンズ側通信端子は、前記交換レンズが前記カメラとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つであり、
     前記レンズ側判定部による判定後に、前記カメラとシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うレンズ側通信設定部を更に備える、
     請求項11に記載の交換レンズ。
    The lens side communication terminal is one of a plurality of terminals used when the interchangeable lens performs serial communication with the camera.
    A lens-side communication setting unit configured to perform communication settings of a plurality of terminals used when serially communicating with the camera after the determination by the lens-side determination unit;
    The interchangeable lens according to claim 11.
  13.  カメラと、前記カメラに着脱自在に装着される交換レンズと、を備えたカメラシステムの互換性判定方法であって、
     前記交換レンズを前記カメラに装着するステップと、
     前記カメラに備えられたカメラ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するステップであって、前記カメラが、特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するステップと、
     前記交換レンズに備えられたレンズ側通信端子の極性を第1極性又は第2極性に設定するステップであって、前記交換レンズが、前記特定の機能に対応している場合は第1極性に設定し、対応していない場合は第2極性に設定するステップと、
     前記カメラ側通信端子の極性に基づいて、前記カメラに装着された前記交換レンズが前記特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定するステップであって、前記カメラ側通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合に前記交換レンズが前記特定の機能に対応していると判定するステップと、
     前記レンズ側通信端子の極性に基づいて、前記交換レンズが装着された前記カメラが前記特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定するステップであって、前記レンズ側通信端子の極性が第1極性の場合に前記カメラが前記特定の機能に対応していると判定するステップと、
     を備え、前記カメラ側通信端子及び前記レンズ側通信端子は、相互に接続された状態で両方とも第1極性に設定された場合にのみ、両方とも第1極性となり、少なくとも一方が第2極性に設定された場合は、両方とも第2極性となる、
     カメラシステムの互換性判定方法。
    A camera system compatibility determination method comprising a camera and an interchangeable lens detachably attached to the camera,
    Attaching the interchangeable lens to the camera;
    The step of setting the polarity of the camera side communication terminal provided in the camera to the first polarity or the second polarity, and when the camera supports a specific function, sets the polarity to the first polarity. If not, setting the second polarity;
    The step of setting the polarity of the lens side communication terminal provided in the interchangeable lens to the first polarity or the second polarity, and when the interchangeable lens corresponds to the specific function, the first polarity is set. If not, the step of setting the second polarity,
    The step of determining whether the interchangeable lens attached to the camera corresponds to the specific function based on the polarity of the camera side communication terminal, wherein the polarity of the camera side communication terminal is first. Determining that the interchangeable lens corresponds to the specific function in the case of polarity;
    The step of determining whether the camera to which the interchangeable lens is attached corresponds to the specific function based on the polarity of the lens side communication terminal, wherein the polarity of the lens side communication terminal is the first Determining that the camera is compatible with the particular function in the case of polarity;
    The camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are both set to the first polarity only when both are set to the first polarity and at least one is set to the second polarity. If set, both will have the second polarity,
    Camera system compatibility judgment method.
  14.  前記カメラ側通信端子及び前記レンズ側通信端子は、前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズがシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子のうちの1つであり、
     前記カメラに装着された前記交換レンズが前記特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定するステップ、及び、前記交換レンズが装着された前記カメラが前記特定の機能に対応しているか否かを判定するステップの後に前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズがシリアル通信する際に使用する複数の端子の通信設定を行うステップを更に含む、
     請求項13に記載のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。
    The camera side communication terminal and the lens side communication terminal are one of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication.
    Determining whether or not the interchangeable lens attached to the camera corresponds to the specific function; and whether or not the camera attached to the interchangeable lens corresponds to the specific function. The method further includes a step of performing communication settings of a plurality of terminals used when the camera and the interchangeable lens perform serial communication after the determining step.
    The camera system compatibility determination method according to claim 13.
  15.  前記カメラシステムは、前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズの間に着脱自在に装着されるアクセサリーを更に含み、
     前記特定の機能は、前記カメラと前記交換レンズとの間に前記アクセサリーが装着された場合に、装着された前記アクセサリーとの間で通信する機能である、
     請求項13又は14に記載のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。
    The camera system further includes an accessory that is detachably mounted between the camera and the interchangeable lens,
    The specific function is a function of communicating with the attached accessory when the accessory is attached between the camera and the interchangeable lens.
    15. A compatibility determination method for a camera system according to claim 13 or 14.
  16.  前記アクセサリーが装着された場合であって、前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズの双方が前記特定の機能に対応している場合、
     前記カメラに備えられたカメラ側拡張通信端子及び前記アクセサリーに備えられたアクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子を介して、前記カメラ及び前記アクセサリーが通信するステップと、
     前記交換レンズに備えられたレンズ側拡張通信端子及び前記アクセサリーに備えられたアクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子を介して、前記交換レンズ及び前記アクセサリーが通信するステップと、
     を更に含む、
     請求項15に記載のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。
    When the accessory is attached, and both the camera and the interchangeable lens support the specific function,
    The camera and the accessory communicate with each other via the camera side extended communication terminal provided in the camera and the accessory side first extended communication terminal provided in the accessory;
    The interchangeable lens and the accessory communicate with each other via the lens side extended communication terminal provided in the interchangeable lens and the accessory side second extended communication terminal provided in the accessory;
    Further including
    The compatibility determination method of the camera system according to claim 15.
  17.  前記交換レンズ及び前記アクセサリーが通信するステップでは、前記交換レンズの情報を前記アクセサリーに送信し、
     前記カメラ及び前記アクセサリーが通信するステップでは、前記交換レンズから受信した前記交換レンズの情報に前記アクセサリーの情報を付加して前記カメラに送信する、
     請求項16に記載のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。
    In the step of communicating the interchangeable lens and the accessory, information on the interchangeable lens is transmitted to the accessory,
    In the step of communicating between the camera and the accessory, information on the accessory is added to information on the interchangeable lens received from the interchangeable lens, and transmitted to the camera.
    The camera system compatibility determination method according to claim 16.
  18.  前記アクセサリーの情報及び前記交換レンズの情報を取得した後、前記カメラ側拡張通信端子、前記アクセサリー側第1拡張通信端子、前記アクセサリー側第2拡張通信端子及び前記レンズ側拡張通信端子を介して、前記カメラ及び前記交換レンズが通信し、前記カメラが前記交換レンズの状態の情報を取得するステップを更に含む、
     請求項17に記載のカメラシステムの互換性判定方法。
    After acquiring the information of the accessory and the information of the interchangeable lens, via the camera side extended communication terminal, the accessory side first extended communication terminal, the accessory side second extended communication terminal, and the lens side extended communication terminal, The camera and the interchangeable lens communicate with each other, and the camera further includes obtaining information on a state of the interchangeable lens;
    The compatibility determination method of the camera system according to claim 17.
PCT/JP2017/047321 2017-01-27 2017-12-28 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and method for determining camera system compatibility WO2018139169A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
DE112017006938.6T DE112017006938B4 (en) 2017-01-27 2017-12-28 CAMERA SYSTEM, CAMERA, INTERCHANGEABLE LENS AND CAMERA SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY DETERMINATION PROCEDURE
JP2018564188A JP6571888B2 (en) 2017-01-27 2017-12-28 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and camera system compatibility determination method
CN201780084791.2A CN110226125B (en) 2017-01-27 2017-12-28 Compatibility determination method of camera system, camera, interchangeable lens and camera system
US16/447,504 US10785408B2 (en) 2017-01-27 2019-06-20 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and compatibility determination method of camera system
US16/999,991 US11336821B2 (en) 2017-01-27 2020-08-21 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and compatibility determination method of camera system
US17/711,676 US11722766B2 (en) 2017-01-27 2022-04-01 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and compatibility determination method of camera system

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017013512 2017-01-27
JP2017-013512 2017-01-27

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/447,504 Continuation US10785408B2 (en) 2017-01-27 2019-06-20 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and compatibility determination method of camera system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018139169A1 true WO2018139169A1 (en) 2018-08-02

Family

ID=62979302

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/047321 WO2018139169A1 (en) 2017-01-27 2017-12-28 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and method for determining camera system compatibility

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (3) US10785408B2 (en)
JP (1) JP6571888B2 (en)
CN (1) CN110226125B (en)
DE (1) DE112017006938B4 (en)
WO (1) WO2018139169A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE112017006941B4 (en) * 2017-01-27 2022-07-28 Fujifilm Corporation Camera system with interchangeable lens, interchangeable lens, camera and power supply method of a camera system
WO2018139169A1 (en) * 2017-01-27 2018-08-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and method for determining camera system compatibility
CN110720208B (en) * 2017-05-31 2021-10-01 佳能株式会社 Camera, accessory device, communication control method, storage medium, and camera system
JP2019078933A (en) * 2017-10-26 2019-05-23 株式会社ニコン accessory
TWI637634B (en) * 2017-12-27 2018-10-01 晶睿通訊股份有限公司 Lens detection method and lens detection system
US11412125B2 (en) * 2018-06-29 2022-08-09 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Imaging apparatus, accessory apparatus, and communication control method
USD908162S1 (en) * 2018-08-24 2021-01-19 Samyang Optics Co., Ltd. Interchangeable lens for camera

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10161221A (en) * 1996-11-28 1998-06-19 Nikon Corp Camera system
JP2005266524A (en) * 2004-03-19 2005-09-29 Fujinon Corp Lens system
JP2011154111A (en) * 2010-01-26 2011-08-11 Fujifilm Corp Vibration isolation device
JP2012154967A (en) * 2011-01-21 2012-08-16 Canon Inc Image pickup apparatus, interchangeable lens, and image pickup apparatus system
JP2015184660A (en) * 2014-03-26 2015-10-22 オリンパス株式会社 Camera system, interchangeable lens, and interchangeable lens control method

Family Cites Families (23)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4896181A (en) 1986-03-31 1990-01-23 Nikon Corporation Camera system
US5255043A (en) * 1988-08-30 1993-10-19 Asahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus for maintaining constant image magnification in a camera system
JP2004045525A (en) * 2002-07-09 2004-02-12 Olympus Corp Camera system, camera and judgement control method of interchangeable lens
JP4555556B2 (en) * 2003-10-09 2010-10-06 オリンパス株式会社 Interchangeable lens camera system
JP2007116474A (en) * 2005-10-20 2007-05-10 Fujifilm Corp Camera system
JP4905692B2 (en) * 2007-03-16 2012-03-28 ペンタックスリコーイメージング株式会社 interchangeable lens
JP5521356B2 (en) 2009-03-04 2014-06-11 株式会社リコー Camera system
JP5208169B2 (en) * 2010-08-06 2013-06-12 キヤノン株式会社 Intermediate accessories for camera systems and camera systems
CN102854705A (en) * 2011-06-30 2013-01-02 株式会社尼康 Accessory, camera, accessory control program, and camera control program
US8814449B2 (en) * 2011-07-22 2014-08-26 Nikon Corporation Adapter, camera system, and adapter control program
US8755684B2 (en) * 2011-07-22 2014-06-17 Nikon Corporation Adapter, camera system, and adapter control program
JP2013025234A (en) * 2011-07-25 2013-02-04 Nikon Corp Camera body, camera system and program
CN103959161B (en) * 2011-12-28 2016-02-03 富士胶片株式会社 Decision method installed by interchangeable lenses formula camera, camera body and camera lens
CN105259731B (en) 2011-12-28 2018-09-28 富士胶片株式会社 Interchangeable lenses
CN104040423B (en) * 2011-12-28 2015-12-09 富士胶片株式会社 Interchangeable lenses formula camera, camera body, lens unit and busy signal control method
JP5829548B2 (en) * 2012-02-27 2015-12-09 株式会社フジクラ Active cable and active cable system
CN104272181A (en) * 2012-05-08 2015-01-07 株式会社尼康 Accessory, camera body
JP2014078892A (en) * 2012-10-11 2014-05-01 Fujikura Ltd Active cable and control method in the same
CN103501402B (en) 2013-08-13 2017-10-13 格科微电子(上海)有限公司 A kind of control method and camera module for camera module
JP5965553B2 (en) * 2013-11-08 2016-08-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Camera system, camera body, interchangeable lens, and communication method
JP6422332B2 (en) * 2014-12-24 2018-11-14 キヤノン株式会社 Electronic device, accessory device, control method thereof, and control program
CN205142300U (en) * 2015-11-10 2016-04-06 路宽 Circumscribed make a video recording subassembly and mobile terminal
WO2018139169A1 (en) * 2017-01-27 2018-08-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and method for determining camera system compatibility

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10161221A (en) * 1996-11-28 1998-06-19 Nikon Corp Camera system
JP2005266524A (en) * 2004-03-19 2005-09-29 Fujinon Corp Lens system
JP2011154111A (en) * 2010-01-26 2011-08-11 Fujifilm Corp Vibration isolation device
JP2012154967A (en) * 2011-01-21 2012-08-16 Canon Inc Image pickup apparatus, interchangeable lens, and image pickup apparatus system
JP2015184660A (en) * 2014-03-26 2015-10-22 オリンパス株式会社 Camera system, interchangeable lens, and interchangeable lens control method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20190306412A1 (en) 2019-10-03
DE112017006938T5 (en) 2019-10-10
JP6571888B2 (en) 2019-09-04
US20220256078A1 (en) 2022-08-11
US11722766B2 (en) 2023-08-08
US20200382698A1 (en) 2020-12-03
US10785408B2 (en) 2020-09-22
CN110226125B (en) 2021-04-09
DE112017006938B4 (en) 2022-06-02
US11336821B2 (en) 2022-05-17
JPWO2018139169A1 (en) 2019-11-07
CN110226125A (en) 2019-09-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6952175B2 (en) camera
JP6571888B2 (en) Camera system, camera, interchangeable lens, and camera system compatibility determination method
JP6779348B2 (en) interchangeable lens
JP5643443B2 (en) Interchangeable lens camera, camera body, lens unit, and busy signal control method
JP5638706B2 (en) Interchangeable lens camera, camera body, and lens mounting determination method
WO2017068912A1 (en) Lens system, accessory, communication method, and program
JP5604014B2 (en) Camera body, interchangeable lens camera, and lens mounting determination method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17893839

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018564188

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17893839

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

点击 这是indexloc提供的php浏览器服务,不要输入任何密码和下载